Paradyne 3160 A3 Users Manual ACCULINK DSU/CSU, S A3, 3161 B3, 3164 A2, And 3165 Operator's Guide A2 GB21 90

3160-A2-GB21-90 3160-A2-GB21-90

3160-A3 to the manual 5bd05cf1-f91b-4608-862a-820ef529987d

2015-02-06

: Paradyne Paradyne-3160-A3-Users-Manual-516443 paradyne-3160-a3-users-manual-516443 paradyne pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 298

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

ACCULINK® DSU/CSU
Models 3160-A3, 3161-B3,
3164-A2, and 3165-A2
Operator’s Guide
Document No. 3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

Notice
This publication is protected by federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language in any form or
by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express
written permission of Paradyne Corporation, 8545 126th Ave. N., Largo, FL 33773.
Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically
disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Further, Paradyne Corporation
reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without
obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes.
Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new
release to this manual.
Standalone
FCC Registration number:
Ringer Equivalence number (REN):
Canadian Certification number:
Canadian DOC Load number:

See label on unit
See label on unit
See label on unit
See label on unit

Carrier Card
FCC Registration number:
Ringer Equivalence number (REN):
Canadian Certification number:
Canadian DOC Load number:

See label on unit
See label on unit
See label on unit
See label on unit

Warranty, Sales, Service, and Training Information
Contact your local sales representative, service representative, or distributor directly for any help needed. For additional
information concerning warranty, sales, service, repair, installation, documentation, training, distributor locations, or
Paradyne worldwide office locations, use one of the following methods:

Internet: Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www.paradyne.com. (Be sure to register your warranty at
www.paradyne.com/warranty.)
Telephone: Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company
representative.
—

Within the U.S.A., call 1-800-870-2221

—

Outside the U.S.A., call 1-727-530-2340

Document Feedback
We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document. Please mail them to Technical Publications,
Paradyne Corporation, 8545 126th Ave. N., Largo, FL 33773, or send e-mail to userdoc@paradyne.com. Include the
number and title of this document in your correspondence. Please include your name and phone number if you are
willing to provide additional clarification.

Trademarks
ACCULINK, COMSPHERE, FrameSaver, Hotwire, MVL, NextEDGE, OpenLane, and Performance Wizard are
registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation. ReachDSL and TruePut are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation. All
other products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered
service marks of their respective owners.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

! Important Safety Instructions
1. Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual.
2. This product (when not powered by the optional direct feed cable) is intended to be used with a 3-wire grounding
type plug – a plug which has a grounding pin. This is a safety feature. Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe
operation. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter.
Prior to installation, use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground.
If the receptacle is not properly grounded, the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has
corrected the problem.
If a 3-wire grounding type power source is not available, consult a qualified electrician to determine another
method of grounding the equipment.
3. Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and to
protect it from overheating, these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered.
4. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power
cord.
5. Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high
voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
6. General purpose cables are provided with this product. Special cables, which may be required by the regulatory
inspection authority for the installation site, are the responsibility of the customer.
7. When installed in the final configuration, the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and
regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed. If necessary, consult with the appropriate regulatory
agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance.
8. A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings. If products
installed in separate buildings are interconnected, the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition.
Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary,
implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products.
9. This product contains a coin cell lithium battery that is only to be replaced at the factory. Caution: There is a
danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same type. Dispose of used
batteries according to the battery manufacturer’s instructions. Attention: Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a
remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type. Mettre au rebut
les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
10. In addition, if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits, take the following precautions:
—

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

—

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.

—

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the
network interface.

—

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

—

Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.

—

Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

Direct Feed Power Supply Warning

! WARNING:
When energizing this product with the supplied direct feed power cable, connect only to a SELV (Safety
Extra Low Voltage) power source with a maximum available output of less than 240 VA. Power
configurations which utilize the direct feed cable to energize the equipment must only be installed by a
qualified electrician in restricted area access locations in accordance with articles 110-16, 110-17, and
110-18 of the National Electric Code (NEC), and articles 2-308, 2-310, 2-312, 2-314, 2-200, and 2-202 of the
Canadian Electric Code (CEC).
A readily accessible disconnect device as part of the building installation shall be incorporated in fixed
wiring. The disconnect device (a 24 or 48 Vdc, 15 or 20 A circuit breaker or switch) must be included in the
ungrounded supply conductor. Over current protection must be a 24 or 48 Vdc, 15 or 20 A fuse or circuit
breaker.

EMI Notices

! UNITED STATES – EMI NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
The authority to operate this equipment is conditioned by the requirements that no modifications will be
made to the equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Paradyne
Corporation.

! CANADA – EMI NOTICE:
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment
regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du réglement sur le matérial
brouilleur du Canada.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Government Requirements and Equipment Return
Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to CSU and modem connection to the telephone network be
included in the installation and operation manual. Specific instructions are listed in the following sections.

United States
NOTICE TO USERS OF THE UNITED STATES TELEPHONE NETWORK
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. The label is
located on the bottom of the standalone 3160, 3164, or 3165 DSU/CSU, and on the 3161 DSU/CSU’s circuit card.
If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
2. There are two types of telephone lines associated with the standalone equipment. The T1 network connection
should be made using a Universal Service Order Code (USOC) type RJ48C jack. The Service Order Code 6.0F
should be specified to the telephone company when ordering the T1 line. In addition, the proper Facility Interface
Code must be specified to the Telephone Company. The DSU/CSU can be configured to support any of the
following framing format and line signaling techniques. The DSU/CSU’s configuration must correspond to the T1
line’s parameters. The standalone 3160, 3164, or 3165 DSU/CSU’s internal modem connects to the Public
Switched Telephone Network using a USOC Type RJ11C jack. The Facility Interface Code 02LS2 along with the
RJ11C jack should be specified to the telephone company when ordering a dial line for the modem. The
3161 DSU/CSU connects to the T1 network using the multi-line USOC-type RJ48H jack and does not have a
PSTN interface.

316x DSU/CSU Facility Interface Codes
Code

Description

04DU9-BN

1.544 Mbps superframe format (SF) without line power

04DU9-DN

1.544 Mbps SF and B8ZS without line power

04DU9-1KN

1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF without line power

04DU-1SN

1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF and B8ZS without line power

3. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone
company to determine the maximum RENs for the calling area.
4. If the 316x DSU/CSU causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with
the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect
the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you
to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

6. If you experience trouble with this equipment, please contact your sales or service representative (as appropriate)
for repair or warranty information. If the product needs to be returned to the company service center for repair,
contact them directly for return instructions using one of the following methods:
—

Internet: Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http://www.paradyne.com

—

Telephone: Call our automated response system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a
company representative.
Within the U.S.A., call 1-800-870-2221
Outside the U.S.A., call 1-727-530-2340

If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you remove the
equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
7. The equipment’s modem cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to
Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission
or corporation commission for information.)
8. FCC compliant telephone line cords with modular plugs are provided with this equipment. This equipment is
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is
Part 68 compliant.

Canada
NOTICE TO USERS OF THE CANADIAN TELEPHONE NETWORK
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In
some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of
a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the
above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request to disconnect the equipment.

CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate
electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
If your equipment is in need of repair, return it using the procedures described on page A in the front of this document.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Contents

About This Guide

vii

Document Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vii

Product-Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii

Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Alarm Message Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Front Panel Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Integral Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Async Terminal Interface Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Telnet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

SNMP Management Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

Standalone DSU/CSU Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

Standalone DSU/CSU Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

SNMP or Telnet Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3

Important Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5

Optional Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5

Installing the +24 Vdc Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5

Installing the Single –48 Vdc Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6

Installing the Redundant –48 Vdc Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7

Cabling Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-8

Power-Up Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-9

Introduction

Document Purpose and Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

Contents

Operation

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

Using the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

Test Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5

Displaying Unit Identity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9

Setting Customer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-11

Selecting the DTE Drop/Insert or Data Port for LED Display . . . . . . . .

3-12

Displaying LED Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-13

Changing Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-14

Displaying/Editing Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-16

Saving Edit Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-17

Selecting/Copying to a Specific Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-18

Configuring the DSU/CSU for SNMP or Telnet Access . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-19

Selecting the Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-20

Setting the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-21

Selecting the Link Layer Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-23

Specifying the Community Name(s) and Access Type(s) . . . . . . .

3-24

Configuring SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-26

Enabling SNMP Trap Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-26

Selecting the Number of Trap Managers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-27

Configuring a Destination for SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-28

Configuring DS0 Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-29

Displaying DS0 Channel Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-36

Allocating Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-38

Block or ACAMI Assignment Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-40

Individual Channel Assignment Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-41

Allocating DS0 Channels from the DTE Drop/Insert Interface
to the Network Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-42

Clearing DS0 Channel Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-44

Providing Backup Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-45

Selecting the Timing Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-45

Configuring for Network Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-47

Configuring for External Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-47

Establishing Access Security on a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-48

Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-49

Entering a Password to Gain Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-50

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Contents

Acquiring/Releasing the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-51

Acquiring the Active User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-52

Releasing the Active User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-53

Enabling/Disabling the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-54

Using the Integral Modem in Standalone DSU/CSUs . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-55

Entering Numbers in the Phone Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-55

Initiating a Call for Front Panel Pass-Through Operation . . . . . . .

3-57

Initiating a Call for PC, ASCII Terminal/Printer, or
SNMP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-59

Disconnecting the Modem Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-60

Enabling the Communication Port for Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs . .

3-61

Deactivating the Alarm Relay for Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs . . . . . .

3-64

Resetting the DSU/CSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-65

Download Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-65

User Interface Access Security for Standalone DSU/CSUs. . . . . . . . .

3-67

Changing User Interface Access Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-68

Maintenance

3160-A2-GB21-90

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Self-Test Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Device Health and Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3

Performance Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-11

SNMP Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-12

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-14

Test Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-17

Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-19

Remote Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-19

Sending a Line Loopback Up or Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-20

Sending a V.54/ANSI FT1 Activation/Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-21

Local Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-22

Starting a Line Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-23

Starting a Payload Loopback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-24

Starting a DTE Loopback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-25

Starting a Repeater Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-26

Starting a Data Channel Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-27

Starting a Data Terminal Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-28

Aborting Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-29

Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-30

Sending Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-31

February 2001

iii

Contents

Monitoring Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-33

Aborting Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-34

Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-35

Starting a Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-35

Aborting a Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-36

Displaying DSU/CSU Test Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-37

A Front Panel Menu
B Technical Specifications

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1

C Configuration Options

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-1

DTE Interface Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-2

Port Configuration Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-3

Network Interface Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-8

Channel Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-10

General Configuration Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-16

User Interface Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-18

Alarm Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-28

Management Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-32

Configuration Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-42

D Pin Assignments

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-1

T1 Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-1

DTE Drop/Insert Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-3

MODEM Port Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-4

AUX Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-5

COM Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-6

EIA-530-A Port Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-8

EIA-530-A-to-RS-449 Cable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-9

EIA-530-A-to-V.35 Cable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-11

EIA-530-A-to-X.21 Cable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-13

Serial Crossover Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-14

Power Input Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-15

Optional DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-15

External Clock Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-16

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Contents

E SNMP MIB Objects

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-1

MIB II (RFC 1213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-2

System Group, MIB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-3

Interface Group, MIB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-4

IP Group, MIB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-10

ICMP Group, MIB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-13

TCP Group, MIB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-13

UDP Group, MIB II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-13

Transmission Group, MIB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-13

SNMP Group, MIB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-14

DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-14

Near End Group, DS1/E1 MIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-14

Far End Group, DS1/E1 MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-18

DS1 Fractional Group, DS1/E1 MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-19

RS-232-like MIB (RFC 1317) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-19

General Port Table, RS-232-like MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-20

Asynchronous Port Table, RS-232-like MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-22

Synchronous Port Table, RS-232-like MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-23

Input Signal Table, RS-232-like MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-23

Output Signal Table, RS-232-like MIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-24

Generic-Interface MIB Extensions (RFC 1229) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-24

Generic Interface Test Table, Generic Interface MIB . . . . . . . . . .

E-25

Enterprise MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-27

Correlation between Menu Commands and SNMP Objects . . . . . . . .

E-28

F IP Network Addressing Scenarios

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F-1

Scenario 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F-2

Scenario 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F-3

Scenario 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F-4

Scenario 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F-5

Scenario 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F-6

G Front Panel Emulation

3160-A2-GB21-90

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G-1

Installing Front Panel Emulation Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G-1

Starting Front Panel Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G-3

February 2001

Contents

H Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-1

Before Using the Asynchronous Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-1

Initiating an Asynchronous Terminal Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-2

Ending an Asynchronous Terminal Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-3

Menu Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-4

Using Asynchronous Terminal Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-5

Setting Customer Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-7

Displaying LED Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-8

Changing Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-9

Displaying or Editing Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-9

Saving Edit Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-11

Establishing Access Security on a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-12

Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-13

Entering a Password to Gain Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-14

Configuration Worksheets for the Asynchronous Terminal Interface . .

H-15

Equipment List
Glossary
Index

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

About This Guide

Document Purpose and Intended Audience
This operator’s guide contains installation, operation, and maintenance information
for the ACCULINK 3160, 3161, 3164, or 3165 Data Service Unit (DSU)/Channel
Service Unit (CSU).
It is designed for installers and users of DSU/CSUs familiar with the operation of
digital data communication equipment.

Document Summary
Section

Description

Chapter 1, Introduction

Describes the 316x DSU/CSUs and their features.

Chapter 2, Installation

Describes how to install the standalone units and make
connections. (Instructions for the carrier-mounted 3161
DSU/CSU are contained in the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and
3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide, Document
No. 3100-A2-GK40.)

Chapter 3, Operation

Provides instructions for using the front panel, changing
configuration options, establishing security, and using the
internal modem.

Chapter 4, Maintenance

Contains procedures for monitoring, testing, and
troubleshooting.

Appendix A, Front Panel
Menu

Contains a menu tree showing all the main front panel
functions.

Appendix B, Technical
Specifications

Contains technical specifications for the 316x DSU/CSUs.

Appendix C, Configuration
Options

Contains all the configuration options and default settings.

Appendix D, Pin Assignments Shows the pin assignments for connectors and cables.
Appendix E, SNMP MIB
Objects

3160-A2-GB21-90

Describes the MIB objects supported by the DSU/CSUs.

February 2001

vii

About This Guide

Section

Description

Appendix F, IP Network
Addressing Scenarios

Provides sample IP addressing schemes.

Appendix G, Front Panel
Emulation

Explains how to use front panel emulation software in lieu
of the front panel.

Appendix H, Asynchronous
Terminal Operation

Explains how to use a VT100-compatible terminal to
configure and control the unit.

Appendix I, Equipment List

Contains order numbers for cables and other related
parts.

Glossary

Defines abbreviations and terms used in this document.

Index

Lists key terms, concepts, and sections in alphabetical
order.

Product-Related Documents
Document Number

Document Title

3000-A2-GA31

COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation
Manual

3000-A2-GB41

COMSPHERE –48 VDC Central Office Power Unit
Installation Guide

3100-A2-GK40

ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General
Information Guide

3162-A2-GB20

ACCULINK 3162 DSU/CSU User’s Guide

3163-A2-GB20

ACCULINK 3163 DSU/CSU User’s Guide

3166-A2-GB20

ACCULINK 3166 DSU/CSU User’s Guide

Contact your sales or service representative to order additional product
documentation.
Paradyne documents are also available on the World Wide Web at
www.paradyne.com. Select Library → Technical Manuals.

viii

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

About This Guide

Reference Documents

3160-A2-GB21-90

AT&T Technical Reference 54016
AT&T Technical Reference 62411
ANSI T1.403-1989
Industry Canada CS-03
CSA-22.2 No. 950
Industry Canada (ICES)-003
FCC Part 15
FCC Part 68
UL 1950

Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-Based
Internets: MIBII. RFC 1213, March 1991
Definitions of Managed Objects for the DS1 and E1 Interface Types.
RFC 1406, January 1993
Definitions of Managed Objects for RS-232-like Hardware Devices.
RFC 1317, April 1992
Extensions to the Generic-Interface MIB. RFC 1229, May 1991

February 2001

About This Guide

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Introduction

1
Overview
The ACCULINK® 316x DSU/CSU acts as an interface between the T1 digital
network and the customer premises equipment, converting signals received from
the DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) to bipolar signals that can be transmitted over
T1 lines. Typical applications include shared access to network-based services,
Local Area Network (LAN)/Wide Area Network (WAN) interconnection, and
fractional T1 network applications.
In addition to the T1 network interface and the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface,
the Model 3160 provides two synchronous data ports while the Model 3164
provides four synchronous data ports. The Model 3165 provides one synchronous
data port, but does not provide the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
The Model 3161 (carrier-mounted DSU/CSU) provides two ports in addition to the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface and is designed to fit into the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier.
For more information about the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU, refer to the ACCULINK
3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.

Features
The DSU/CSU optimizes network performance with a wide range of features such
as the following:

3160-A2-GB21-90

Software configuration menu displayed via a liquid crystal display (LCD) to
permit quick and easy operation, and elimination of complicated hardware
strapping.
Local or remote configuration and operation flexibility.
Several loopback capabilities and test pattern generators.
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) capability.
Alarm message display/print capability.
Front panel emulation via Windows-based Front Panel Emulation software.
Integral modem for standalone DSU/CSUs.

February 2001

1-1

1. Introduction

Asynchronous (async) terminal interface support.
Telnet access for remote async terminal operations.
Network management provided through industry-standard Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface
The DTE Drop/Insert interface allows DTEs/PBXs that support the DS1 signal
format to share the T1 network with other high-speed equipment. This is available
on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.

Alarm Message Capability
The DSU/CSU can be attached, either locally or remotely, to an ASCII terminal or
printer to display or print alarm messages. Alarms can also be displayed on a PC
that is using a terminal emulation package.

Front Panel Emulation
The DSU/CSU offers functionality through Front Panel Emulation software that is
similar to that provided by the DSU/CSU front panel. The functionality of the front
panel is available by clicking on the function keys with the mouse rather than by
pressing keys from the actual front panel.

Integral Modem
The standalone DSU/CSUs contain an integral low-speed (2400 bps), V.22bis dial
modem that enables communication with remote devices such as another
316x DSU/CSU, an ASCII terminal or printer, or a PC running the 3100 Series
Front Panel Emulation software.

Async Terminal Interface Support
The DSU/CSU can be configured and managed from an asynchronous (async)
terminal. The async terminal’s full screen display uses a menu hierarchy similar to
the DSU/CSU’s front panel. You can perform device management and
configuration operations as if you are using the DSU/CSU’s front panel, but you do
not have the limitation of the 2-line, 16-character LCD.

Telnet Access
Remote async terminal operations can be performed using Telnet access. Telnet is
a Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) service that supports a
virtual terminal interface.

1-2

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

1. Introduction

SNMP Management Support
SNMP is a network management protocol that is used to monitor network
performance and status, and to report alarms (i.e., traps). To function, SNMP
requires a manager consisting of a software program housed within a workstation
or PC; an agent consisting of a software program housed within a device (e.g., the
DSU/CSU); and a Management Information Base (MIB) consisting of a database
of managed objects. The DSU/CSU can be managed by any industry-standard
SNMP manager.
Two link layer protocols, Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and Serial Line Internet
Protocol (SLIP), are supported for connection to an external SNMP manager or
network device (e.g., a router).
The SNMP manager or network device can be directly connected to the
communications (COM) port. An external LAN Adapter can be connected to either
the COM port or the auxiliary (AUX) port to provide Ethernet connectivity. Also, the
DSU/CSU can be daisy chained together by connecting the COM port of one
device to the AUX port of the other, providing SNMP connectivity.
The SNMP management system can communicate to the DSU/CSU remotely
through the Facility Data Link (FDL) or (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) the
synchronous data port’s Embedded Data Link (EDL).

Physical Description
The 316x Series consists of a Model 3160 DSU/CSU (2-port), a Model 3164
DSU/DSU (4-port), a Model 3165 DSU/CSU (1-port), and a Model 3161
(carrier-mounted) DSU/CSU.
For more information about the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU, refer to the ACCULINK
3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.

Standalone DSU/CSU Front Panel
The standalone DSU/CSU front panel contains,

One 2-line, 16-alphanumeric-character-per-line liquid crystal display (LCD)
One 7-button keypad (three Function and four directional keys)
Twelve light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Six test jacks for the Model 3160/3164 DSU/CSU, and two test jacks for the
Model 3165 DSU/CSU

The front panels are shown in Figure 1-1, 3160 DSU/CSU Front Panel, Figure 1-2,
3164 DSU/CSU Front Panel, and Figure 1-3, 3165 DSU/CSU Front Panel.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

1-3

1. Introduction

LCD

ACCULINK
F1

3160

NET

MON

Out

EQPT

FAIL TEST

SIG

OOF ALRM EER

SIG

OOF ALRM PDV

BPV

NETWORK

DTR

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

496-14936

Figure 1-1.

3160 DSU/CSU Front Panel

LCD

ACCULINK
F1

3164

NET

MON

Out

EQPT

FAIL TEST

SIG

OOF ALRM EER

SIG

OOF ALRM PDV

BPV

NETWORK

DTR

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

496-14937

Figure 1-2.

1-4

3164 DSU/CSU Front Panel

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

1. Introduction

LCD

ACCULINK
F1

NET
MON
In

3165

FAIL TEST

SIG

OOF ALRM EER

DTR

TXD

RXD

CTS

RTS

Out

NETWORK

PORT

495-14567-01

Figure 1-3.

3165 DSU/CSU Front Panel

Standalone DSU/CSU Rear Panel
The standalone DSU/CSU rear panel contains the connectors required for the
operation of the DSU/CSU (Figure 1-4, 3160 DSU/CSU Rear Panel, Figure 1-5,
3164 DSU/CSU Rear Panel, and Figure 1-6, 3165 DSU/CSU Rear Panel). The
connectors and their functions are listed in Table 1-1, Standalone DSU/CSU Rear
Panel Connectors.

AUX

PORT 2

POWER

PORT 1

EXT CLK

COM

MODEM

DSX-1

NET

99-16234

Figure 1-4.

3160-A2-GB21-90

3160 DSU/CSU Rear Panel

February 2001

1-5

1. Introduction

COM PORT MODEM

POWER
AUX PORT

NEC
CLASS 2
INPUT

NETWORK
DTE

CAUTION: AUX PORT OR COM PORT MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PSTN OR T1 NETWORK

CLOCK IN

PORT 3

PORT 4

PORT 1

PORT 2

494-14564

Figure 1-5.

3164 DSU/CSU Rear Panel

COM PORT MODEM

POWER

NETWORK

PORT 1

NEC
CLASS 2
INPUT

CAUTION: AUX PORT OR COM PORT MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PSTN OR T1 NETWORK

495-14565-01

Figure 1-6.

1-6

3165 DSU/CSU Rear Panel

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

1. Introduction

Table 1-1.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Standalone DSU/CSU Rear Panel Connectors

Name

Function

POWER

Supplies power to the DSU/CSU by providing an
attachment for the ac power module or the optional dc
power cable (+24 or –48 Vdc).

AUX PORT

Supports SNMP LAN Adapter or daisy-chain connections.

COM PORT

Provides access to a locally connected PC, ASCII terminal
or printer, SNMP management link, or async terminal
interface.

MODEM

Provides a connection to the integral modem for access to
a remotely connected PC, ASCII terminal or printer, SNMP
management link, or async terminal interface.

NETWORK

Provides access to the T1 network.

DTE (Model 3160/3164)

Provides access to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.

CLOCK IN (Models
3160/3164)

Used to attach an external clock to the DSU/CSU.

PORTs 1–4

Used to connect the customer's synchronous data DTE to
the DSU/CSU.

February 2001

1-7

1. Introduction

1-8

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Installation

2
Overview
This chapter contains information for installing your standalone DSU/CSU. It
includes application examples, cabling, and power-up information.

NOTE:
Installation instructions for the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU are located in the
ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and
the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.

Application Examples
The DSU/CSU acts as an interface between the T1 digital network and the
customer’s equipment.
The DSU/CSU is connected to the customer’s equipment through one of the
synchronous data ports (PORTs 1– 4) or the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. It
is connected to the T1 digital network through the network interface.

NOTE:
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is only available on 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs.
Some common applications for the DSU/CSU are:

3160-A2-GB21-90

Point-to-Point LAN interconnection (Figure 2-1, Point-to-Point Application
Example).
Shared access to network-based services (Figure 2-2, Shared Access
Application Example).
Fractional T1 network applications (Figure 2-3, Fractional T1 Application
Example).

February 2001

2-1

2. Installation

NETWORK
LAN
ROUTER

DSU/CSU

LAN
ROUTER
496-15003-01

Figure 2-1.

Point-to-Point Application Example

PBX

NETWORK
SERVICES
DSU/CSU

LAN
ROUTER

Figure 2-2.

LAN
ROUTER

496-15004-01

Shared Access Application Example

DSU/CSU
LAN
ROUTER

FRACTIONAL
NETWORK
DSU/CSU

LAN
ROUTER

DSU/CSU

496-15005-01

Figure 2-3.

2-2

Fractional T1 Application Example

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

2. Installation

SNMP or Telnet Connection Examples
The DSU/CSU can be connected to an SNMP or Telnet system in a number of
ways. Some examples include:

Directly connecting the COM port to the SNMP or Telnet device (Figure 2-4,
Direct Connection).
Connecting the COM port to a network device (e.g., a router) (Figure 2-5,
Connection through a Router).
Connecting the COM port or the AUX port to an external LAN Adapter for
Ethernet connectivity (Figure 2-6, Connection through a LAN Adapter).
Daisy chaining the COM port of one device to the AUX port of the other
(Figure 2-7, LAN Adapter and Daisy Chaining).
Remotely accessing the DSU/CSU through the Facility Data Link (FDL) or the
synchronous data port’s Embedded Data Link (EDL) (Figure 2-8, Remote
Access through FDL/EDL).

NOTE:
EDL is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.

ETHERNET

LAN
ROUTER

DSU/CSU

NETWORK

PPP/SLIP
496-15006-01

Figure 2-4.

Direct Connection

ETHERNET

LAN
ROUTER

DSU/CSU

Paradyne

NETWORK

PPP/SLIP
496-15007-01

Figure 2-5.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Connection through a Router

February 2001

2-3

2. Installation

ETHERNET

LAN
ROUTER

DSU/CSU

NETWORK

LAN
ADAPTER

Figure 2-6.

PPP
496-15008-01

Connection through a LAN Adapter

DSU/CSU

PPP

DSU/CSU

NETWORK
ETHERNET

LAN
ROUTER

PPP

LAN
ADAPTER

Figure 2-7.

DSU/CSU

PPP

496-15009-01

LAN Adapter and Daisy Chaining

DSU/CSU

LAN
ROUTER

ETHERNET

NETWORK
FDL/EDL
PPP
LAN
ADAPTER
496-15010-01

Figure 2-8.

2-4

Remote Access through FDL/EDL

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

2. Installation

Important Instructions
Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the DSU/CSU or
included in this guide.
For a complete listing of the safety instructions, see Important Safety Instructions
at the beginning of this guide.

! HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STATIC-SENSITIVE

DEVICES

496-15104

This product is designed to protect sensitive components from damage
due to electrostatic discharge (ESD) during normal operation. When
performing installation procedures, however, take proper static control
precautions to prevent damage to equipment. If you are not sure of the
proper static control precautions, contact your nearest sales or service
representative.

Optional Power Sources
The DSU/CSU is typically powered by the ac power module. Use the
following procedures only if you want to use an optional SELV (Safety Extra
Low Voltage) dc power source.
Using the optional dc power cable, the DSU/CSU is capable of operating on either
a +24 Vdc power source, –48 Vdc single source battery, or –48 Vdc redundant
source batteries (for power backup). To use dc power, choose one of the following
power supply types.

Installing the +24 Vdc Power Supply
To install the DSU/CSU using a +24 Vdc SELV power supply, refer to Figure 2-9,
+24 Vdc Power Supply Pinouts, and use the following procedure.

Procedure
To install the +24 Vdc power supply:
1. Connect the green wire to a suitable ground.
2. Connect the white wire to the +24 Vdc return.
3. Connect the orange wire to the +24 Vdc source.
4. Cut the black, red, and blue wires off at the outer insulation.
5. Plug the power connector into the DSU/CSU.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

2-5

2. Installation

DSU/CSU POWER
PLUG
1
2
3
4
5

TO CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED BATTERY
BLACK

RED

GREEN

GROUND

WHITE

+24 VDC RETURN

ORANGE

+24 VDC SOURCE

BLUE

99-14298-02

Figure 2-9.

+24 Vdc Power Supply Pinouts

Installing the Single –48 Vdc Power Supply
To install the DSU/CSU using a single source –48 Vdc SELV power supply, refer to
Figure 2-10, –48 Vdc Single Source Power Supply Pinouts, and use the following
procedure.

Procedure
To install the –48 Vdc single source power supply:
1. Connect the black and red wires to the –48 Vdc return source.
2. Connect the green wire to a suitable ground.
3. Connect the orange and blue wires to the – 48 Vdc input source.
4. Cut the white wire off at the outer insulation.
5. Plug the power connector into the DSU/CSU.

DSU/CSU POWER
PLUG
1
2
3
4
5
6

TO CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED BATTERY
BLACK
–48 VDC RETURN

RED
GREEN
WHITE

GROUND

ORANGE
BLUE

–48 VDC INPUT

99-14299-02

Figure 2-10. –48 Vdc Single Source Power Supply Pinouts

2-6

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

2. Installation

Installing the Redundant –48 Vdc Power Supply
To install the DSU/CSU using a redundant –48 Vdc SELV power supply, refer to
Figure 2-11, –48 Vdc Redundant Source Power Supply Pinouts, and use the
following procedure.

Procedure
To install the redundant –48 Vdc power supply:
1. Connect the black wire to the –48 Vdc return source B.
2. Connect the red wire to the –48 Vdc return source A.
3. Connect the green wire to a suitable ground.
4. Connect the orange wire to the –48 Vdc input source B.
5. Connect the blue wire to the –48 Vdc input source A.
6. Cut the white wire off at the outer insulation.
7. Plug the power connector into the DSU/CSU.

DSU/CSU POWER
PLUG
1
2
3
4
5
6

TO CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED BATTERY
BLACK

–48 VDC RETURN B

RED

–48 VDC RETURN A

GREEN
WHITE

GROUND

ORANGE
BLUE

–48 VDC INPUT B
–48 VDC INPUT A

99-14300-02

Figure 2-11. –48 Vdc Redundant Source Power Supply Pinouts

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

2-7

2. Installation

Cabling Examples
The DSU/CSU is supplied with an ac power module and a VF cable for the integral
modem.
Optional cables are described in Appendix D, Pin Assignments.
Figure 2-12, Cabling Examples, illustrates some cabling examples.

PSTN

MODEM

MODEM
OR
PC

TERMINAL

SNMP
MANAGER

MODEM
PORT

FRONT
PANEL

3164 DSU/CSU
COM
PORT

MODEM
PORT

NETWORK
PORT

AUX

PORT 2

POWER

PORT 1

3160
DSU/CSU

EXT CLK

COM

MODEM

DSX-1

NETWORK
PORT

NET

T1 NETWORK
COM PORT

POWER

COM PORT MODEM

POWER

SERIAL
PORT

3164
DSU/CSU

NETWORK
PORT

AUX PORT

NEC
CLASS 2
INPUT

NETWORK
DTE

CAUTION: AUX PORT OR COM PORT MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PSTN OR T1 NETWORK

CLOCK IN

PORT 3

PORT 4

PORT 1

PORT 2

POWER
TO
ROUTER
OR
T1 OR SERIAL CONNECTIONS
DIAL CONNECTIONS

SNMP
MANAGER
TERMINAL
99-16250

Figure 2-12. Cabling Examples

2-8

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

2. Installation

Power-Up Self-Test
After you connect the DSU/CSU to a power source, the unit performs the power-up
self-test to ensure that it is in good working order. The DSU/CSU performs this test
on itself upon power-up or after a device reset, unless it has been disabled by the
Self-Test configuration option (see Appendix C, Configuration Options).
The self-test includes a basic processor test, a limited memory test, a code
checksum test, and basic verification tests of the internal components. The front
panel LCD displays the progress and pass/fail status of these power-up tests.
The power-up self-test consists of the following steps:
1. Once the DSU/CSU is plugged in, the In Progress screen appears and the Fail
LED blinks ON and Off continuously.

Self-Test:
In Progress
F2

2. All the LEDs then start to flash simultaneously in the pattern twice ON, then
Off. Then, the LCD begins to flash characters and numbers in the same
pattern, alternating with the flashing LEDs.
3. If the self-test is successful, the Passed screen appears for one second, the
Fail LED turns Off and the OK LED lights.

Self-Test:
Passed
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

2-9

2. Installation

If the self-test fails, the Failed screen appears for five seconds. The Fail LED
lights, and an eight-digit failure code (xxxxxxxx) is displayed for use by service
personnel to determine the cause of the self-test failure. The DSU/CSU
continues to try to operate. If you are in doubt about the results of the self-test,
use the Self-Test Health command to display the status of this test (see
Self-Test Health in Chapter 4, Maintenance).

Self-Test:
Failed xxxxxxxx
F1

4. The top-level menu screen appears.

DSU ESF
Stat Test Cnfig
F1

2-10

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Operation

3
Overview
This chapter contains information for operating your DSU/CSU. It includes a
description of the front panel and sample procedures for configuring the
DSU/CSU.

NOTE:
Additional information for the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU is located in the
ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and
the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.

Using the Front Panel
The standalone DSU/CSU front panel (Figure 3-1, Standalone DSU/CSU Front
Panel) consists of an LCD, a keypad, test jacks, and 12 LEDs. The
carrier-mounted DSU/CSU faceplate contains test jacks and 12 LEDs, however,
the LCD and keypad are located on the Shared Diagnostic Control Panel (SDCP)
of the 3000 Series Carrier. For more information about the SDCP, refer to the
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.

NOTE:
You can display a graphical representation of the DSU/CSU front panel on an
attached PC (see Appendix G, Front Panel Emulation).

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-1

3. Operation

LCD

ACCULINK
F1

3160

NET

MON

Out

EQPT

FAIL TEST

SIG

OOF ALRM EER

SIG

OOF ALRM PDV

BPV

NETWORK

DTR

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

496-14936

Figure 3-1.

Standalone DSU/CSU Front Panel

LCD
The LCD (Figure 3-2, LCD) displays two types of data:

Messages such as alarms, command/test completion, and action in progress
Front panel menu tree information (see Appendix A, Front Panel Menu)

Figure 3-2.

LCD

The LCD displays status messages as requested via the Device Health and Status
branch of the front panel menu (see Device Health and Status in Chapter 4,
Maintenance). In addition, the highest level status message appears on the front
panel automatically if no front panel action has occurred at the DSU/CSU for the
past five minutes.
The LCD also lists commands, configuration options, and test results. In most
cases, the top line shows the command or option name and default value, while
the second line displays options and responses. When a response is required,
select from the options displayed directly above the Function keys (F1, F2, F3);
make your choice by pressing the corresponding Function key.

3-2

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Keypad
The 7-button keypad (Figure 3-3, Keypad) enables you to navigate through the
menu tree and select choices presented on the second line of the LCD.

Figure 3-3.

Use the

Keypad

key to move up the menu.

Use the
key to exit any part of the menu in which you may be operating. You
immediately return to the top-level menu screen shown on the front panel menu
(see Appendix A, Front Panel Menu).

Use the Function (F1, F2, F3) keys to make selections from the choices presented
on the second line of the LCD. When this line presents choices, it is generally
divided into three sections, each displayed directly above one of the Function keys.
When your choice appears above one of the Function keys, press that key to
select that choice.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-3

3. Operation

The scroll keys (
and
) serve one of two functions, depending on whether a
menu screen or a data entry screen appears on the front panel.
For data entry screens, the
key scrolls one character to the left while the
key scrolls one character to the right.
For menu screens, the
key scrolls to the previous menu choice while the
key scrolls to the next menu choice.

If a choice is available to the left of the screen, the character ← appears on the top
line. If a choice is available to the right of the screen, the → character appears on
the top line. If choices are available to both the right and the left of the screen, two
arrows appear (⇔). The arrows indicate that you must use the scroll keys to bring
the additional options onto the screen.

Test Jacks
Test jacks are located on the DSU/CSU front panel (Figure 3-4, Test Jacks
(Standalone DSU/CSU)). These are described in Test Jacks in Chapter 4,
Maintenance. (The 3165 provides only the Network Monitor In and Network
Monitor Out test jacks.)

NET

MON

EQPT

Out

Out
496-14808

Figure 3-4.

3-4

Test Jacks (Standalone DSU/CSU)

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

LEDs
There are twelve LEDs on the DSU/CSU front panel. The five LEDs on the right
(Figure 3-5, DSU/CSU LEDs) are shared between the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface and the data ports. Refer to Selecting the DTE Drop/Insert or Data Port
for LED Display on page 3-12 to choose which port’s status the LEDs display.

NOTE:
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is only available on 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs.
OK

FAIL TEST

SIG

OOF ALRM EER

SIG

OOF ALRM PDV

BPV

NETWORK

DTR

TXD

RTS

RXD

CTS

493-14301

Figure 3-5.

DSU/CSU LEDs

A green LED indicates normal operation. A yellow LED indicates a warning (for the
DTE Drop/Insert interface) or activity (for the data ports). Conditions are sampled
every tenth of a second.
The twelve front panel LEDs are grouped into four sections to indicate the status of
the:

3160-A2-GB21-90

System LEDs (Table 3-1)
Network Interface LEDs (Table 3-2)
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface LEDs (Table 3-3)
Data Port LEDs (Table 3-4)

February 2001

3-5

3. Operation

Table 3-1.

System LEDs

Name

Color

Meaning

Green

Indicates the current operational state of the DSU/CSU.

ON: The DSU/CSU is operational and has power.
OFF: The DSU/CSU is performing a power-up self-test or a
system failure has occurred.
BLINKING: A software download is in progress.
FAST BLINK: The carrier-mounted DSU/CSU is currently
selected by the SDCP.
FAIL

Yellow

Indicates a system failure or a self-test.

ON: A device error/fault is detected or a reset has just occurred.
OFF: No system failures are detected.
BLINKING : A self-test is in progress.
TEST

Yellow

A system test is in progress.

ON: A loopback or pattern test has been initiated either locally, by
the network, or externally.
OFF: No tests are active.

Table 3-2.

Network Interface LEDs

Name

Color

Meaning

SIG

Green

Monitors the signal being received from the network.

ON: A recoverable signal is being received from the network.
OFF: The signal cannot be recovered from the network (a Loss of
Signal condition exists).
OOF

Yellow

Monitors Out Of Frame (OOF) conditions on the received
network signal.

ON: At least one OOF was detected on the signal during the
sampling period.
OFF: No OOFs were detected on the signal during the sampling
period.
ALRM

Yellow

Indicates whether an alarm condition exists on the received
network signal.

ON: An alarm condition (LOS, LOF, EER, Yellow, AIS) exists on
the received network signal. Use the Device Health and Status
command to determine the alarm type.
OFF: No alarm condition exists on the network interface signal.
EER

Yellow

Indicates the Excessive Error Rate (EER) has been exceeded on
the network interface.
NOTE: This LED is only valid when ESF framing is being used.

ON: The EER has been exceeded on the network interface.
OFF: The EER has not been exceeded on the network interface.

3-6

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

NOTE:
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is only available on 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs.

Table 3-3.

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface LEDs

Name

Color

Meaning

SIG

Green

Monitors the signal being received from the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.

ON: A recoverable signal is being received from the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
OFF: The signal cannot be recovered from the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface (a Loss of Signal condition exists).
OOF

Yellow

Monitors Out Of Frame (OOF) conditions on the received DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal.

ON: At least one OOF was detected on the signal during the
sampling period.
OFF: No OOFs were detected on the signal during the sampling
period.
ALRM

Yellow

Indicates whether an alarm condition exists on the received DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal.

ON: An alarm condition (LOS, LOF, EER, Yellow, AIS) exists on
the received DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal. Use the Device
Health and Status command to determine the alarm type.
OFF: No alarm condition exists on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface signal.
PDV

Yellow

Monitors Pulse Density Violations (PDV) on the received DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal.

ON : At least one PDV was detected (and corrected) on the
received DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal during the sampling
period.
OFF: No PDVs were detected on the received DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) signal during the sampling period.
BPV

Yellow

Monitors Bipolar Violations (BPV) on the received DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal.

ON: At least one BPV was detected (and corrected) on the
received DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal during the sampling
period.
OFF: No BPVs were detected on the received DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) signal during the sampling period.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-7

3. Operation

Table 3-4.

Data Port LEDs

Name

Color

Meaning

DTR

Green

Monitors the state of interchange circuit CD (CCITT 108/1, /2) –
Data Terminal Ready received from the synchronous data DTE.

ON: DTR is being asserted by the synchronous data DTE.
OFF: DTR is not being asserted.
TXD

Yellow

Monitors activity on interchange circuit BA (CCITT 103) –
Transmitted Data. This is the data sent from the synchronous
data DTE to the data port on the DSU/CSU.

ON: Ones are being received from the synchronous data DTE.
OFF: Zeros are being received from the synchronous data DTE.
CYCLING: Both ones and zeros are being received from the
synchronous data DTE.
RXD

Yellow

Monitors activity on interchange circuit BB (CCITT 104) –
Received Data. This is data sent to the synchronous data DTE
from the data port on the DSU/CSU.

ON: Ones are being sent to the synchronous data DTE.
OFF: Zeros are being sent to the synchronous data DTE.
CYCLING: Both ones and zeros are being sent to the
synchronous data DTE.
CTS

Yellow

Monitors the state of interchange circuit CB (CCITT 106) –
Clear-to-Send sent to the synchronous data DTE.

ON: CTS is being asserted by the DSU/CSU.
OFF: CTS is not being asserted.
RTS

Yellow

Monitors the state of interchange circuit CA (CCITT 105) –
Request-to-Send received from the synchronous data DTE.

ON: RTS is being asserted by the synchronous data DTE.
OFF: RTS is not being asserted.

3-8

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

NOTE:
The following procedures are examples only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model of the DSU/CSU.

Displaying Unit Identity
The identity of the DSU/CSU (serial number, model number, software revision
level, hardware revision level, and customer identification) is available through the
Status branch of the front panel menu (see Appendix A, Front Panel Menu).
The customer identification is the only identity number you can change.

Procedure
To display the DSU/CSU’s identity (ID):
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.

Stat

DSU ESF
Test

Cnfig
F3

2. From the Status screen, press the
screen.

key until the ID selection appears on the

3. Select ID.

Status:
TStat

LED

4. The following screens appear in the order listed each time you press the
key.

Identity:
Ser=xxxxxxx
F1

Identity:
Mod=xxxx-xx-xxx
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-9

3. Operation

Identity:
Cust ID=xxxxxxxx
F1

Identity:
SRev=xx.xx.xx
F1

Identity:
CCA1=xxxx-xxx
F1

Identity:
CCA2=xxxx-xxx
F1

3-10

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Setting Customer Identification
The customer identification is the only identity number you can change. It is used
to uniquely identify the DSU/CSU.

Procedure
To change the customer identification (CID):
1. From the top-level menu, press the
the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection appears on

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
the screen.

key until the CID selection appears on

4. Select CID.

Control:
Reset
CID
F1

Passwd
F3

5. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the desired character.
You must enter a character before the
moves the cursor to the next space
to the right.

CustID:xxxxxxxx
Up
Down
F1

Save
F3

6. Enter the desired ID. Press F1 (Up) and F2 (Down) to scroll up and down
through the valid characters/numbers for the customer ID. Valid characters are
0 through 9, #, -, ., /, A to Z, and blank space. Press F3 (Save) to save the ID.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-11

3. Operation

Selecting the DTE Drop/Insert or Data Port for LED Display
Use the LED command on the Control branch to select which port’s (DTE
Drop/Insert or data port) status appears on the five shared LEDs on the front
panel.

Procedure
To select a port for LED display:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select LED.

Control:
Call
Rel
F1

LED
F3

The currently selected port name appears on the top line of the LCD. DTE
indicates the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port.

LED Dsply: DTE
DTE
Prt1
F1

Prt2
F3

4. From the LED Dsply screen, press the Function key that corresponds to the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) or data port for which you want the LEDs to display.
Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
Select DTE to monitor the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port’s SIG, OOF, ALRM,
PDV, and BPV status signals on the shared LEDs.
Select a particular data port to monitor the data port’s DTR, TXD, RXD, CTS,
and RTS control signals on the shared LEDs.

3-12

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Displaying LED Conditions
The same conditions monitored by the front panel LEDs can also be monitored by
the LED command. This command is most useful when the DSU/CSU is being
accessed remotely (see Appendix G, Front Panel Emulation). When using Front
Panel Emulation, no LEDs are shown on the PC’s screen; you must use the Stat
command procedure described below to get LED information.

NOTE:
The following procedure is an example only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model of the DSU/CSU.

Procedure
To display LED conditions on the front panel screen:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
2. From the Status screen, press the
the screen.

key until the LED selection appears on

3. From the Status screen, select LED.

Status:
Perf

TStat

LED
F3

4. From the Select LEDs screen, press the Function key that corresponds to T1
interface or the data port for which you want to display LEDs. Use the scroll
keys, if necessary.

Select LEDs:
T1
Prt1
F1

Prt2
F3

If you chose T1, the LED Display screen lists the LED signals, two at a time,
on the second line. A vertical bar at the left of the LED name indicates the
condition is ON, while an underscore indicates the condition is Off.

LED Display:
_Test
_NetSig
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-13

3. Operation

If you chose a port, the Port n LEDs screen lists the LED signals, two at a time,
on the second line. A vertical bar at the left of the LED name indicates the
condition is ON, while an underscore indicates the condition is Off.

Port n LEDs:
_DTR
_TXD
F1

5. Use the

and

keys to scroll LED names onto the screen.

Changing Configuration Options
The DSU/CSU is an intelligent device that displays only valid options for the
current configuration. Therefore, you are only presented with menu choices that
are consistent with the current configuration and operational state of the
DSU/CSU; invalid combinations of configuration options do not appear. For
example, menus displayed for the Model 3160 (2 ports) and the Model 3164
(4 ports) differ due to the number of ports available. Also, if the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface selection is disabled, many of the menu choices do not appear.
Be aware that although all options are shown in this guide, what you see on your
DSU/CSU varies with your configuration.
The DSU/CSU offers configuration options located in the following memory areas:

3-14

Active (Activ) – This is the configuration option set currently active for the
DSU/CSU. Before a configuration option set becomes active for the DSU/CSU,
you must save the set to the Active area. When the DSU/CSU is shipped from
the factory, the Active configuration option set is identical to the Factory set.
This area can be written to and controls the current operation of the device.
Customer 1 (Cust1) – This is the first of two sets of customer-defined
configuration options. This area can be written to.
Customer 2 (Cust2) – This is the second of two sets of customer-defined
configuration options. This area can be written to.
Factory 1 (Fact1) – This is a set of configuration options preset at the factory.
This set is determined by what is considered to be the most common
configuration used in the DSU/CSU market. Factory 1 options are read-only.
Factory 2 (Fact2) – This is a set of configuration options preset at the factory.
This set is determined by what is considered to be the second most common
configuration used in the DSU/CSU market. Factory 2 options are read-only.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

The configuration options are divided into functional groups. Appendix C,
Configuration Options, contains a list of the configuration options and defaults.
These groups are:

DTE Interface Configuration Options
Port Configuration Options
Network Interface Configuration Options
Channel Configuration Options
General Configuration Options
User Interface Configuration Options
Alarm Configuration Options
Management Configuration Options

The DSU/CSU arrives with two preset factory default configuration settings. These
settings are based on the following:

Factory 1 – ESF framing format with B8ZS line coding format for both the
network and the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces. Data ports are
unassigned.
Factory 2 – D4 framing format with AMI line coding format for both the
network and the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces. Data ports are
unassigned.

If neither of the factory default settings support your network’s configuration, you
can customize the configuration options to better suit your application.
Use the Configuration (Cnfig) branch of the front panel menu tree to display or
change DSU/CSU configuration options (see Appendix C, Configuration Options).

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-15

3. Operation

Displaying/Editing Configuration Options
Procedure
To display/edit configuration options:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.

Stat
F1

DSU ESF
Test
F2

Cnfig
F3

2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.

Load from:
Activ
Cust1
F1

3. Select Edit.

Choose Funct:
Edit
Save
F1

4. From the Edit screen, select the functional group you want to edit by pressing
the appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary. (The NET
selection is shown as an example only.)

Edit:
DTE

Port

NET
F3

The configuration options for the selected functional group appear on the front
panel one option at a time. The option name appears on Line 1 with the
current value next to it. To reach other options, use the Next and Previous
selections to scroll forward and backward through the group of options.

3-16

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

NET Framing: ESF
Next
D4
ESF
F1

5. Press the appropriate Function key to choose another value. Use the scroll
keys, if necessary.
6. Use the Save procedure to save your changes to the Active or Customer area.

Saving Edit Changes
Save edit changes to the Active area when you want those changes to take effect
immediately. Save edit changes to the Customer area when you want to overwrite
the existing Customer configuration options and store these changes for future
use.

NOTE:
If you attempt to exit the Edit function after making changes without performing
a Save, the DSU/CSU prompts you with Save Options? Choose Yes or No.

Procedure
To save edit changes:
1. From the Choose Funct screen (one level above the Edit screen, two levels
below the top-level menu screen), select Save.

Choose Funct:
Edit
Save
F1

2. Choose whether you want to save to the Active, Customer 1, or Customer 2
area. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.

Save Edit to:
Activ
Cust1
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-17

3. Operation

Selecting/Copying to a Specific Port
For the DSU/CSU, you have the capability of selecting a specific port to configure,
and then (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) copying the configuration options from
that port to another port (or to all ports).

NOTE:
The following procedure is an example only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model and configuration of the DSU/CSU.

Procedure
To select a specific port to configure:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, select Port.

Edit:
DTE

Port

NET
F3

5. From the Port Select screen, press the Function key that corresponds to the
port you want to configure. Use the
key to scroll addition ports onto the
screen, if necessary. Configure the port (see Appendix C, Configuration
Options).

Port Select:
Copy
Prt1
F1

3-18

Prt2
F3

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Procedure
To copy the configuration options to one or all ports:
1. From the Port Select screen, select Copy.
Port Select:
Copy
Prt1
F1

Prt2
F3

2. Select the port from which you want to copy the configuration options using
the corresponding Function key.
Copy From:
Prt1
Prt2
F1

Prt3
F3

3. Select the port to which you want to copy the configuration options using the
corresponding Function key. Or, press F1 (All) to choose to copy to all ports.
Copy To:
All
Prt1
F1

Prt2
F3

Configuring the DSU/CSU for SNMP or Telnet Access
To configure the DSU/CSU for SNMP or Telnet access:

3160-A2-GB21-90

Enable the SNMP agent or Telnet server within the DSU/CSU (see
Appendix C, Configuration Options).
Select and configure the port that provides the link to the SNMP or Telnet
system.
Set the Internet Protocol (IP) address and subnet mask needed to access the
DSU/CSU (see Appendix F, IP Network Addressing Scenarios).
Select the link layer protocol (PPP or SLIP) for the port that provides the link to
the SNMP or Telnet system.
For SNMP links, specify the two community names (and their access levels)
that are allowed to access the device’s Management Information Base (MIB).
For SNMP links, configure the device to send traps to the SNMP manager, if
desired.
Specify the Telnet password or SNMP validation options, if desired (see
Appendix C, Configuration Options).

February 2001

3-19

3. Operation

Selecting the Port
The SNMP manager, Telnet device, or network device (e.g., a router) can be
directly connected to the communications (COM) port. An external LAN Adapter
can be connected to either the COM port or the auxiliary (AUX) port to provide
Ethernet or Token Ring connectivity. Also, the DSU/CSU can be daisy chained
together by connecting the COM port of one device to the AUX port of the other,
providing SNMP or Telnet connectivity. Use the MODEM port when accessing the
DSU/CSU through a dial-up connection.
The COM port can support either synchronous or asynchronous PPP, or
asynchronous SLIP at data rates of up to 38,400 bps. The AUX port can support
data rates up to 38,400 bps. The MODEM port can support either synchronous or
asynchronous PPP, or asynchronous SLIP at data rates of up to 2400 bps.
The example shown below assumes that the COM port is being used as the link to
the SNMP or Telnet system.

Procedure
To select the COM port as the SNMP or Telnet link:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.

key until the User selection appears on the

5. Select User.

Edit:
Chan

Gen

User

6. Press F1 (Next) until the Com Use configuration option appears.
7. Select Mgmt to configure the COM port as the SNMP or Telnet link.

Com Use:
Next
Mgmt
F1

3-20

ASCII
F3

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Setting the IP Address
The IP address is the address used by the SNMP or Telnet system to access the
DSU/CSU (see Appendix F, IP Network Addressing Scenarios). For DSU/CSUs
using PPP, the IP address can be negotiated if the network device (e.g., router or
SNMP manager) supports such negotiation. The IP address is composed of four
fields with three digits per field (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
The IP address is set for the MODEM port, the COM port, or the AUX port (with
LAN Adapter or daisy chain), depending on which one has been chosen as the
SNMP or Telnet communication link. The example below assumes that an IP
address of 010.155.111.222 is being set for the COM port. You can use the same
principles to assign any value (between 000 and 255 for each digit field) to other
ports.

Procedure
To assign an IP address to the COM port:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Mgmt selection appears on

5. Select Mgmt.

Edit:
User
F1

Alarm
F2

Mgmt
F3

6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Gen.

Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F1

7. Press F1 (Next) until the Com IP Adr configuration option appears.

NOTE:
Steps 8 and 9 describe the process for entering an IP address. This
process applies to any IP address.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-21

3. Operation

8. Press F2 (Edit) to edit the IP address. You have the option of using F3 (Clear)
to reset the IP address to the factory default 000.000.000.000.

Com IP Adr:
Next
Edit
F1

Clear
F3

9. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the digit you want to
change. Press F1 (Up) to increment the digit or F2 (Down) to decrement the
digit. In this example, you would press
once to place the cursor under the
middle digit in the first digit field, then press F1 (Up) once to change the 0 to
a 1. Continue in this manner to change the other digits.

000.000.000.000
Up
Down
F1

Save
F3

10. When you are through changing the IP address, you must press F3 (Save) to
save the value. Otherwise, the original value will be retained.

010.155.111.222
Up
Down
F1

3-22

Save
F3

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Selecting the Link Layer Protocol
Two link layer protocols, Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and Serial Line Internet
Protocol (SLIP), are supported for connection to an external SNMP manager,
Telnet device, or network device (e.g., a router). PPP can be used for synchronous
or asynchronous operation. SLIP can be used for asynchronous operation only.

NOTE:
The carrier-mounted DSU/CSU does not support synchronous operation on
the COM port.
The standalone DSU/CSU implementation of PPP supports the following:

Full negotiation of PPP’s Link Control Protocol (LCP).
Active negotiation of LCP when the connection is established.
Maximum Request Unit (MRU) sizes up to 1500 bytes, but the DSU/CSU will
attempt to negotiate down to 500 bytes.
The DSU/CSU provides a unique LCP magic number derived from the unit
serial number and the elapsed time.
Full negotiation of escape characters.

The DSU/CSU implementation of PPP does not support Link Quality Reports
(LQR), compression, encryption, Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) or
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP).
The DSU/CSU implementation of SLIP supports a fixed MRU size of 1006 bytes.
Before selecting the protocol, you must first select the port to be used as the
communications link. Refer to Selecting the Port on page 3-20. This example
assumes that the COM port is being used as the communications link.

Procedure
To select the link layer protocol:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

key until the Mgmt selection appears on

3-23

3. Operation

5. Select Mgmt.

Edit:
User
F1

Alarm

Mgmt

6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Gen.

Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F1

7. Press F1 (Next) until the Com Link configuration option appears.
8. Press F2 (PPP) or F3 (SLIP).

Com Link:
Next
PPP
F1

SLIP
F3

Specifying the Community Name(s) and Access Type(s)
You have the capability of specifying up to two community names (community
name 1 and community name 2) to be used by external SNMP managers when
trying to access objects in the DSU/CSU’s MIB. Once you specify the community
name(s), you must then specify the type of access to the MIB that SNMP
managers in the community are permitted to have.

Procedure
To specify the community name 1 and its access type:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

3-24

February 2001

key until the Mgmt selection appears on

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

5. Select Mgmt.

Edit:
User
F1

Alarm
F2

Mgmt
F3

6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Gen.

Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F1

7. Press F1 (Next) until the CommunityName1 configuration option appears.
8. Press F2 (Edit) to edit the community name.

CommunityName1:
Next
Edit
Clear
F1

NOTE:
Steps 9 and 10 describe the process for entering text strings for Mgmt
configuration options. This process applies to entering any text strings into
Mgmt configuration options.
9. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the character you want
to change. Press F1 (Up) or F2 (Down) to scroll through the valid
numbers/characters for the text string.

public
Up

Down

Save
F3

The F1 (Up) key scrolls through the ASCII character set in the following order:
numbers (0–9), lowercase letters (a–z), uppercase letters (A–Z), space
character, ASCII symbols (ascending order, based on ASCII code), and the
End of Line symbol (← ) The ← erases all characters to the right of the cursor.
10. When you are through changing the community name, you must press F3
(Save) to save the value. Otherwise, the original value will be retained.
11. Press F1 (Next) until the Access 1 configuration option appears.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-25

3. Operation

12. Press F2 (Read) or F3 (R/W).

Access 1:
Next
Read
F1

R/W
F3

The Read selection allows read-only access (SNMP “Get”) to the accessible
objects in the MIB when community name 1 is used. The R/W selection allows
Read/Write access (SNMP “Get” and “Set”) to the objects in the MIB. Write
access is allowed for all objects specified as read/write in the MIB. Read
access is allowed for all objects specified as read-only or read/write.

Configuring SNMP Traps
A trap is an unsolicited message that is sent from the DSU/CSU to an SNMP
manager when the DSU/CSU detects certain pre-specified conditions. These
traps enable the SNMP manager to monitor the state of the network.
The SNMP Trap configuration option must be enabled for trap messages to be
sent over the communications link. You must specify the number of SNMP
managers that are to receive traps from this DSU/CSU, an IP address for each
SNMP manager specified, and the type of traps to be sent from this DSU/CSU. For
more information, refer to Appendix C, Configuration Options, and SNMP Traps in
Chapter 4, Maintenance.

Enabling SNMP Trap Messages
Procedure
To enable SNMP trap messages from this DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Alarm selection appears on

5. Select Alarm.
Edit:
User
F1

Alarm
F2

Mgmt
F3

6. Press F1 (Next) until the SNMP Trap configuration option appears.

3-26

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

7. Press F2 (Enab) to enable trap messages over the SNMP management link.

SNMP Trap:
Next
Enab
F2

Disab
F3

Selecting the Number of Trap Managers
If you intend to issue traps to an SNMP manager(s) from this device, you must
specify the number of SNMP managers that are to receive the traps.

Procedure
To specify the number of SNMP managers to receive traps from this device:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Mgmt selection appears on

5. Select Mgmt.

Edit:
User
F1

Alarm
F2

Mgmt
F3

6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Trap.

Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F1

7. Select the number of SNMP managers to receive traps (from 1 through 6) by
using the appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.

Num Trap Mgrs:1
Next
1
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

2
F3

February 2001

3-27

3. Operation

Configuring a Destination for SNMP Traps
A destination must be configured for each SNMP trap manager specified. This
configuration option is displayed for the number of trap managers specified by the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.

Procedure
To configure an IP address for the SNMP trap manager:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Mgmt selection appears on

5. Select Mgmt.

Edit:
User
F1

Alarm
F2

Mgmt
F3

6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Trap.

Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F1

7. Press F1 (Next) until the Trapn IP Address configuration option appears.
8. Press F2 (Edit) to edit the IP address. You have the option of using F3 (Clear)
to reset the IP address to the factory default 000.000.000.000. Refer to Setting
the IP Address on page 3-21 for more information on setting an IP address.
9. Press F1 (Next) until the Trapn Destination configuration appears, and select
the destination for the SNMP trap by using the appropriate Function key. Use
the scroll keys, if necessary.

Trapn Dst:
Next
None
F1

3-28

Com
F3

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Configuring DS0 Channels
The DSU/CSU provides channel configuration options that allow you to do the
following:

Display the DS0 assignments for the network, DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1), and
data port interfaces.
Allocate DS0 channels on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the
network interface.
Allocate DS0 channels on the network or DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to
particular data ports.
Clear (deallocate) all DS0 channels from the network, DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1), or data port interface.
Map data from one port to another.

To allocate DS0 channels, begin by defining the logical channel configuration for
the network interface, and then the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, and then
any ports, if desired. See Figure 3-6, Example of Channel Allocation, for an
example of a conceptual diagram of a channel configuration.
Blank configuration worksheets are provided at the back of Appendix C,
Configuration Options. To complete the configuration worksheets for DS0 channel
allocation:
1. Complete the Network Interface and the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface
tables (unless the DTE Drop/Insert interface is disabled) as shown in the
examples in Figure 3-7, Example of Interface Worksheet for Network Interface,
and Figure 3-8, Example of Interface Worksheet for DTE Drop/Insert Interface.
2. Complete the Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS) information worksheet as shown in
the examples in Figure 3-9, Example of RBS Information Worksheet.
3. Using the worksheets shown in Figure 3-10, Port Channel Configuration
Worksheet (Ports 1 and 2), and Figure 3-11, Port Channel Configuration
Worksheet (Ports 3 and 4), circle the configuration options needed to
implement the logical channel configuration.
Once you have completed the worksheets, enter this information using the
procedures in Allocating Data Ports on page 3-38.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-29

3. Operation

DTE DROP/INSERT
(DSX-1) INTERFACE
D1
D2

NETWORK
INTERFACE

D10

D11

D12

N10

D13

N11

D14

N12

D15

N13

D16

N14

D17

N15

D18

N16

D19

N17

D20

N18

D21

N19

D22

N20

D23

N21

D24

N22
N23

PORTS
PRT 1

N24

PRT 2
PRT 3
PRT 4
496-14907-01

Figure 3-6.

3-30

Example of Channel Allocation

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Network Interface
Network Channel

Allocation

N6
N7
N8
N9

N10

D10

N11

D11

N12

D12

N13

D15

N14

Prt1

N15

Prt1

N16

Prt1

N17

Prt3

N18

Prt2

N19

Prt2

N20

Prt2

N21

Prt2

N22

Prt2

N23

Prt2

N24

Prt3

Allocations:
D1 – D24 indicates allocation to DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) channels.
Prt1 – Prt4 indicates allocation to synchronous data ports.

Figure 3-7.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Example of Interface Worksheet for Network Interface

February 2001

3-31

3. Operation

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface
DTE (DSX-1) Channel

Allocation

D6
D7
D8
D9

D10

N10

D11

N11

D12

N12

D13
D14

N13

D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
Allocations:

N1 – N24 indicates allocation to network channels.

Figure 3-8.

3-32

Example of Interface Worksheet for DTE Drop/Insert Interface

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

DTE Chan Config

Assign: (N1 – 24)

Voice (RBS or Data)

RBS

Data

RBS

D10

N10

RBS

D11

N11

Data

D12

N12

Data

N13

Data

D6
D7
D8

D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24

Figure 3-9.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Example of RBS Information Worksheet

February 2001

3-33

3. Operation

Port Chan
Conf

Options

Value

Assign To

NET, DTE, Prt2, Prt3, Prt4

Assign By

Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate

Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704,
768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344, 1408,
1472, 1536
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616,
672, 728, 784, 840, 896, 952, 1008, 1064, 1120, 1176, 1232,
1288, 1344

If Assign By Block
Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)

Port Rate

Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768

Port 1

Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI

Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)

If Assign By Chan

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)

Assign To

NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt3, Prt4

Assign By

Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate

If Assign By Block
Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)

Port Rate

Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768

Port 2

Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI

If Assign By Chan

Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)
Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)

Figure 3-10. Port Channel Configuration Worksheet (Ports 1 and 2)

3-34

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Port Chan
Conf

Options

Value

Assign To

NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt2, Prt4

Assign By

Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate

If Assign By Block
Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)

Port Rate

Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768

Port 3

Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI

Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)

If Assign By Chan

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)

Assign To

NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt2, Prt3

Assign By

Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate

If Assign By Block
Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)

Port Rate

Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768

Port 4

Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI

If Assign By Chan

Start At

Figure 3-11. Port Channel Configuration Worksheet (Ports 3 and 4)

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-35

3. Operation

NOTE:
The following procedures are examples only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model and configuration of the DSU/CSU.

Displaying DS0 Channel Assignments
Use the Display command (in the Channel Configuration branch) to view how the
DS0 channels are currently allocated.
Line 1 of the display shows the 24 channels of the selected interface. Pressing the
or
key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three. Line 2
displays what is allocated to the DS0 channel listed in Line 1. Symbols used in the
display are shown in Table 3-5, Display Channel Symbols.
Table 3-5.

Display Channel Symbols

Symbol

Meaning

–

The DS0 channel is not allocated.

Prtn

The DS0 channel is allocated to Port n, where n is 1, 2, 3, or 4.

The DS0 channel is allocated to the network interface DS0 channel n,
where n can be any number from 1 through 24.

The DS0 channel is allocated to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface
DS0 channel n, where n can be any number from 1 through 24.

Procedure
To display the DS0 channel allocation:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Chan selection appears on

5. Select Chan.

Edit:
Port
F1

3-36

NET
F2

Chan
F3

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

6. From the Channel Config screen, select Dsply.

Channel Config:
Dsply
Clear
F1

DTE
F3

7. From the Display Chan screen, select NET to display the channels allocated to
the network interface. Or, select DTE to display the channels allocated to the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.

Display Chan:
NET
DTE
F1

Ports
F3

8. If you selected NET the channels allocated to the network interface are
displayed. Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface, while Line
2 displays what is allocated to the DS0 channel shown in Line 1. Pressing the
or
key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three.

N1
D2
F1

N2
D3

N3
Prt1

If you selected DTE, the channels allocated to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface are displayed. Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, while Line 2 displays what is allocated to the
DS0 channel shown in Line 1.

D1
–
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

D2
N1
F2

D3
N2
F3

February 2001

3-37

3. Operation

Allocating Data Ports
By using the configuration options, assign a specific port to DS0 channels on
either the network interface or the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. The
following methods are available to assign DS0 channels to the port:

Block – Allows a block of contiguous channels to be assigned by specifying a
data port rate and an initial DS0 channel (the first DS0 channel in a block of
DS0 channels). The number of channels assigned is determined by the port
rate. Only those initial DS0 channel numbers that provide enough bandwidth
(based on the port’s data rate) are displayed on the screen. These channels
are automatically assigned to the destination T1 interface (Network or DTE
Drop/Insert) when the initial DS0 channel is selected.
ACAMI (Alternate Channel Alternate Block Inversion) – Allows a block of
contiguous channels to be assigned by specifying a data port rate and an
initial DS0 channel (the first DS0 channel in a block of DS0 channels).
However, with ACAMI, the number of channels assigned is twice the number
needed for the port rate. This is because with ACAMI, every alternate DS0
channel (starting with the n+1 DS0 channel), does not carry data from the
port, but instead always transmits and receives all ones.
Chan (Channel) – Individually selects the DS0 channels to allocate to the
data port. The data port rate is automatically determined based on the number
of channels selected.

Once a port is selected, you have access to the configuration options to complete
the port allocation procedure. These configuration options enable you to,

3-38

Assign the selected port to the desired interface.
Select the desired method for channel allocation.
Select the port rate and starting channel (if the allocation method is block or
ACAMI).
Select the specific channels (if the allocation method is by individual channel).

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Procedure
To select the data port:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Chan selection appears on

5. Select Chan.

Edit:DTE
Port
NET
F1

Chan
F3

6. From the Channel Config screen, press the
screen.

key to scroll the ports onto the

7. Select the desired port by pressing its corresponding Function key.

Channel Config:
Prt1
Prt2
F1

Prt3
F3

8. The configuration option for the data port channel allocation destination
appears on the screen. Select NET to assign this port to the network interface,
select DTE to assign this port to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or
press the
key and the appropriate Function key to assign this port to
another port.

Assign To:NET
Next
NET
F1

DTE
F3

9. Press F1 (Next) to display the appropriate configuration options on the screen.
Use one of the following examples, depending on whether you are assigning
by block, ACAMI, or individual channel.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-39

3. Operation

Block or ACAMI Assignment Method
The Assign By configuration option screen appears after you select a port.

Procedure
To assign by the block or ACAMI method:
1. Press F2 for Block or F3 for ACAMI.

Assign By:
Next
Block
F1

ACAMI
F3

Assign By:
Next
Block
F1

ACAMI
F3

2. Press F1 (Next) to display the next configuration option (Port Rate).
3. Use the
or
key to scroll the desired port rate onto the screen. Rates
scroll in groups of three. Available selections depend on the current base rate
selected for the port. Press the corresponding Function key to select the port
rate. Then, select Next to display the Start At configuration option on the
screen.

Port Rate:384
Next
64
F1

128
F3

NOTE:
For port-to-port mapping, the procedure is complete after the port rate is
selected.

3-40

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

4. The Start At screen displays the configuration option used to select the
starting DS0 channel. If the destination selected is the network interface, then
the network channels appear on the screen. If the destination selected is the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, then these channels appear on the
screen.
The following screen shows an example for the network interface. Use the
or
key to scroll the desired channel onto the screen. Use the Function keys
to select the starting channel. Only those DS0 channel numbers that provide
enough bandwidth (based on the configured data rate) to be used as a starting
channel number are displayed. Channel allocation for this port can only be
cleared by selecting Clear.

Start At:Clear
Next
Clear
F1

N1
F3

Individual Channel Assignment Method
The Assign By configuration option screen appears after you select a port.

Procedure
To assign by the individual channel method:
1. Press the

key once to bring the Chan selection onto the screen.

Assign By:Block
Next
Block ACAMI
F1

2. Press F3 (Chan).

Assign By:Chan
Block
ACAMI
F1

Chan
F3

3. Press F1 (Next) to display the next configuration option (channel allocation).

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-41

3. Operation

4. Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface or the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, depending on which destination was chosen.
This example assumes that the network is the destination. Line 2 displays
what is allocated to the DS0 channel shown in Line 1. Pressing the
or
key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three. Select the channel
by pressing the Function key under the desired number. Portn appears. The
port is assigned to that channel. To deallocate a port, press the Function key
under that port number. Pressing the Function key under channels assigned to
other ports has no effect.

Next
F1

N1
Prt1

N2
Prt2

Allocating DS0 Channels from the DTE Drop/Insert Interface to the Network Interface
By using the configuration options, you can allocate DS0 channels from the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the network interface and specify which DS0
channels carry Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS) information for voice channels.

Procedure
To allocate DS0 channels from the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the
network interface:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Chan selection appears on

5. Select Chan.

Edit:
Port
F1

NET

Chan

6. From the Channel Config screen, select DTE.

Channel Config:
Dsply
Clear
F1

3-42

DTE
F3

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

7. From the DTE Channels screen, press F1 to select Assign.

DTE Channels:
Assign
Voice
F1

8. Press the Function key below the network channel desired. Each time that you
press the Function key, the DTE channel number will scroll up one number. If
the network channel is currently unassigned (‘‘–” is displayed on Line 2), the
DTE channel number initially displays the same number as the corresponding
network channel number. However, if the network channel is currently
assigned, the DTE channel number is shown as Dn. Pressing the Function key
for D24 wraps the display back to D1. Only those channels that are not already
assigned will appear on the LCD when scrolling. The network channels
assigned to ports (Prt1...Prt4) are unavailable for assignment.

N1
D1
F1

N2
D2
F2

N3
–
F3

Procedure
To specify DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) channels used to carry voice information,
1. Press
screen.

from the channel allocation screen to return to the DTE Channels

N1
D1
F1

N2
D2

N3
–

2. From the DTE Channels screen, press F2 to select Voice.

DTE Channels:
Assign Voice
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-43

3. Operation

3. Line 1 displays the 24 DS0 channels for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface. Pressing the
or
key scrolls the channels onto the screen in
groups of three. Line 2 displays whether the DS0 channel in Line 1 is a data
channel (Data) or a voice (RBS) channel. Each time that you press the
Function key located below the desired channel, the display in Line 2 toggles
between Data and RBS.

D1
RBS

D2
RBS

D3
RBS

Clearing DS0 Channel Allocation
You can clear (deallocate) all the DS0 channels currently allocated to either the
network interface, the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or the synchronous data
ports.

Procedure
To clear DS0 channel allocation:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Chan selection appears on

5. Select Chan.

Edit:
Port

NET

Chan
F3

6. From the Channel Config screen, select Clear.

Channel Config:
Dsply
Clear
F1

3-44

DTE
F3

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

7. From the Clear Channel screen, select NET to clear all DS0 channels
assigned to the network interface. Or, select DTE to clear all DS0 channels
assigned to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. Or, select a port to clear all
assignments for that data port.

Clear Channel:
NET
DTE
F1

Port1
F3

Providing Backup Capability
If the T1 network fails, the DSU/CSU provides the ability to reconfigure the unit
and restore (at least partially) priority data circuits through an external backup
device.
You can store backup configuration options in the Customer 2 set of
customer-defined configuration options. The Enterprise MIB variable
devConfigAreaCopy allows the entire contents of one configuration area to be
copied into another configuration area via SNMP.
By cross-connecting two synchronous data ports to each other, one port can
provide a backup path for the other. As soon as the ports are configured to be
mapped to each other, Data Set Ready (DSR) for the ports is turned on. The
external backup device can be configured to initiate dialing when it detects the
off-to-on transition of DSR.

Selecting the Timing Source
The DSU/CSU provides the ability to select a master clock (timing) source that is
used to synchronize all of the T1 and data port interfaces on the DSU/CSU. The
clock for each interface is at the appropriate rate for that interface
(e.g., 1.544 Mbps for the T1 interfaces, the configured port rate for the data ports),
and it is independent of the master clock rate. This means that the master clock
rate and the DSU/CSU interface rates may be different.
The clock source configuration options enable you to select either the network
interface, a synchronous data port, the internal clock, the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface, or an external clock. If external clocking is selected, you must
use the clock rate configuration option to specify the clock rate. Figure 3-12,
Common Clocking Configurations, shows some common clocking configurations.
Two sample procedures for configuring timing are given in the following sections,
Configuring for Network Timing on page 3-47 and Configuring for External Timing
on page 3-47. For more information on configuration options, refer to Appendix C,
Configuration Options.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-45

3. Operation

NOTE:
The external clock source is only available for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, the external clock provides timing for up to
eight slots in the carrier. Each Auxiliary Backplane must have its own external
clock input.

NETWORK

CLOCK: NETWORK

CLOCK: INTERNAL

CLOCK: NETWORK

CLOCK: EXTERNAL

CLOCK: NETWORK

CLOCK: DTE (G.703) CONNECTOR

CLOCK: NETWORK

PBX

TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT
CLOCK: PORT 1, 2, 3, OR 4

CLOCK: NETWORK
496-14341-03

Figure 3-12. Common Clocking Configurations

3-46

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Configuring for Network Timing
Procedure
To configure for network timing:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.

key until the Gen selection appears on the

5. Select Gen.

Edit:
NET
F1

Chan
F2

Gen
F3

6. Press F1 (Next) to display the next configuration option (Clock Src).
7. Select the master clock source. For network, press F2 (note that network is
also the default).

Clock Src:NET
Next
NET
F1

DTE
F3

Configuring for External Timing
Procedure
To configure 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs for external timing:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.

key until the Gen selection appears on the

February 2001

3-47

3. Operation

5. Select Gen.

Edit:
NET
F1

Chan

Gen

6. Press F1 (Next) to display the next configuration option (Clock Src).
7. Select the master clock source. For external, press the
selection appears on the screen.

key until the Ext

8. Select Ext (external timing).

Clock Src:Ext
Prt1
Int
F1

Ext
F3

9. Select the appropriate external clock rate by pressing the corresponding
Function key. This step is mandatory if you have chosen external clocking.

Clock Rate:1544
Next
2048
F1

1544
F3

Establishing Access Security on a Port
Although the password feature is available, it is not required as a factory default. If
used, it ensures access security before device control is passed to a device
connected to a port. The password configuration option can be individually set for
the COM or MODEM port, or both if security is needed on both port types. The
default is None. The password itself is set separately (refer to the following
section, Setting a Password on page 3-49).

Procedure
To establish access security on a port:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.

3-48

4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.

key until the User selection appears on the

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

5. Select User.

Edit:
Chan

Gen

User
F3

6. Press F1 (Next) until the Password configuration option appears.
7. Select port(s) to receive access security (None, Com, Modem, or Both). Use
the scroll keys, if necessary.

Password:None
Next
None
F1

Com
F3

Setting a Password
In addition to establishing access security on a port (refer to the previous section,
Establishing Access Security on a Port on page 3-48) the password itself is set.
Unless you specify otherwise, the password is null.

Procedure
To set a password:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
on the screen.

key until the Passwd selection appears

4. Select Passwd.

Control:
Reset
CID
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

Passwd
F3

February 2001

3-49

3. Operation

5. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the desired character.
You must enter a character before the
moves the cursor to the next space
to the right.

Passwd: xxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Save
F1

6. Enter the desired password. Press F1 (Up) and F2 (Down) to scroll up and
down through the valid characters/numbers for the password. Valid password
characters are 0-9, a-z, A-Z, #, -, ., and /. Press F3 (Save) to save the
password.

Passwd: xxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Save
F1

Entering a Password to Gain Access
You are prompted to enter a password (up to 8 characters) when you are
accessing a port whose Password configuration option is set (refer to the previous
section, Setting a Password on page 3-49).
Valid password characters are 0-9, a-z, A-Z, #, -, ., and /. The existing password is
not shown on the screen. An underscore in the first position shows where to enter
the first character. If the password is set to all null characters (default value), press
F3 (Done) when the password screen first appears.
The following screen appears when you access a DSU/CSU that has a password
enabled.

Passwd:_
Up
Down
F1

3-50

Done
F3

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Procedure
To enter a password:
1. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the desired character.
You must enter a character before the
key moves the cursor to the next
space to the right. The
key is not destructive.

Passwd:xxxxxxxx
Up
Down
F1

Done
F3

2. Enter the required password. Press F1 (Up) and F2 (Down) to scroll up and
down through the valid characters/numbers for the password. You have five
minutes to enter the correct password before the DSU/CSU ends the session.
3. Press F3 (Done) to indicate you are done entering the password. If you enter
an invalid password, the message Invalid Password appears.

Acquiring/Releasing the User Interface
You can access the user interface from either the front panel, the COM port, the
MODEM port (for standalone DSU/CSUs), or the SDCP (for carrier-mounted
DSU/CSUs). The DSU/CSU allows only one user interface to be active at a time.
The front panel is the default user interface at power-up or after a reset. It is also
the default during a software download or when a failure occurs at either the local
or remote PC interface.
You can switch an inactive user interface to active if:

3160-A2-GB21-90

The current active user interface has had no activity (no key was pressed) for
at least five minutes.
The active user interface has been released with the Release command.
The active interface connection is broken. This includes the call disconnect for
a modem interface or the termination of the front panel emulation program on
a locally-attached PC (if the PC supports DTR) or the termination of the async
terminal interface on a remote or locally attached terminal.

February 2001

3-51

3. Operation

Acquiring the Active User Interface
To acquire the active user interface, press any key. If you are using the PC
interface, use the mouse to click on the desired Function key.
The top-level menu screen appears on the active user interface, regardless of
what screen was displayed at the previous active user interface.

Stat
F1

DSU ESF
Test
F2

Cnfig
F3

The inactive interface displays the following message when a Function key is
pressed or a connection is made on the inactive user interface and control cannot
be switched because the currently active interface is in use. On the screen, either
Ft. Panel (front panel), Com Port, Modem, or SDCP is displayed in the user
interface (User I/F ) field.

DSU ESF
User I/F active
F1

The inactive interface displays the following message after control has been
released from the previously active interface and another interface has not
become active.

DSU ESF
User I/F idle
F1

3-52

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Releasing the Active User Interface
To release the current active user interface, either allow five minutes to elapse
without pressing any key or use the Release command.

Procedure
To use the Release command:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Rel (Release).

Control:
Call
F1

Rel
F2

LED
F3

The active user interface is released. The message Released appears. No
user interface is active until input is received from a user interface.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-53

3. Operation

Enabling/Disabling the Front Panel
You can enable or disable the display of information on the front panel. This feature
is useful for ensuring that other users do not inadvertently change the device’s
configuration options while you are using an external device (e.g., a PC or async
terminal). The factory default is Enable.

NOTE:
If you disable the front panel, be sure not to alter the configuration options for
using an external device (e.g., a PC or async terminal). If this happens, you
lose the ability to communicate with the device. You will need to contact your
service representative.

Procedure
To enable or disable the front panel:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.

key until the User selection appears on

5. Select User.
6. Press F1 (Next) until the FP Access configuration option appears.
7. Press F2 to enable the front panel or F3 to disable the front panel.

FP Access:
Next
Enab
F1

3-54

Disab
F3

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Using the Integral Modem in Standalone DSU/CSUs
The standalone DSU/CSU’s integral modem enables your DSU/CSU to
communicate with remote devices to display alarm messages or to function as the
user interface. The carrier-mounted DSU/CSU does not have an integral
modem.
The Call command, available from the Control branch of the menu tree, provides
the following functions to initiate and terminate modem connections:

Pass – Initiates a call through the integral modem to access a far-end
DSU/CSU’s front panel from your DSU/CSU’s front panel (or PC attached to
the COM port).
Dial – Initiates a call through the integral modem to a printer, ASCII terminal,
or PC. Sets up a semipermanent connection to route alarm messages to the
specified destination.
Disconnect – Disconnects an active modem connection.
Change Directory – Allows entry of phone numbers into the internal phone
directories.

For additional information, refer to User Interface Configuration Options in
Appendix C, Configuration Options.

Entering Numbers in the Phone Directories
The DSU/CSU has five general directories (1 through 5) and one alarm directory
(A). Use the general directories to store phone numbers for remote devices such
as standalone DSU/CSUs and ASCII printers. Use the alarm directory to store the
phone number of the primary ASCII terminal or printer you use to display or print
alarms. This function is not available for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs because the
integral modem is not available for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.

Procedure
To enter or change numbers in the phone directories:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Call.

Control:
Call
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

Rel
F2

LED
F3

February 2001

3-55

3. Operation

4. From the Call Setup screen, select ChDir.
Call Setup:
Pass
Dial
F1

ChDir
F3

The Directory 1 displays first, along with its phone number if one has been
entered.
5. Press F1 (Next) to display the next directory (2, in this case). Press F2
(Previous) to display the previous directory (A, in this case). Directories
appear in order, 1 through 5 and then A.
1: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Next
Prev
Edit
F1

6. Press F3 (Edit) to change the displayed directory’s phone number (phone
numbers can be up to 40 characters). If you select Edit, the Edit screen
appears.
1: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Next
Prev
Edit
F1

7. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the digit(s) you want to
change. Press F1 to scroll up to a higher digit. Press F2 to scroll down to a
lower digit. The
key inserts blanks (default characters) while the
key
invokes the End Of Number (EON) character which terminates the dial string
and erases any characters to the right when you use the Save function.
See Table 3-6, Valid Phone Number Characters, for the set of valid characters
and rules that apply to entering phone numbers.
Example: P9W8135551212
8. Press F3 (Save) to store your changes in nonvolatile memory. If you press
or
before saving the phone number you just changed, the previous
phone number remains in effect.
1: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Save
F1

3-56

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Table 3-6.

Valid Phone Number Characters

Valid
Characters

Meaning

Restrictions

0 to 9

DTMF or pulse digits

—

DTMF digits

—

Selects Pulse dialing

Pulse or Tone must be specified,
otherwise Tone is the default. This must
be the first character in the string,
unless the first character is B. Then, it
must immediately follow the B.

Selects Tone (DTMF) dialing

Tone or Pulse must be specified,
otherwise Tone is the default. This must
be the first character in the string,
unless the first character is B. Then, it
must immediately follow the B.

Wait for dial tone

—

Blind dialing (you need not wait
for a dial tone before entering
the dialing sequence)

To be valid, this must be the first
character in the string.

Creates a 2-second pause in
the dialing sequence

—

( ) -

Extra characters for readability.
The space is the default
character.

—

End Of Number (EON)
character, terminates the dial
string and erases all characters
to the right after F3 (Save) is
pressed

—

Initiating a Call for Front Panel Pass-Through Operation
Front panel pass-through initiates a call through the integral modem to access a
far-end DSU/CSU’s front panel from your DSU/CSU’s front panel (or PC attached
to the COM port).

NOTE:
Pass is only available when the FP Pass configuration option has been
enabled (see Appendix C, Configuration Options), the active physical interface
is either the front panel or the PC, and the integral modem is not already in
use.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-57

3. Operation

Procedure
To initiate front panel pass-through at the near-end DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Call.

Control:
Call
Rel
F1

LED
F3

4. From the Call Setup screen, select Pass.

Call Setup:
Pass
Dial
F1

ChDir
F3

5. From the Pass Directory screen, press F1 (Up) to display the next higher
numbered directory or press F2 (Down) to select the next lower numbered
directory.

Pass n: xxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Dial
F1

6. When the number of the desired directory appears on the screen, press F3
(Dial) to place the call.

Pass n: xxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Dial
F1

3-58

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Initiating a Call for PC, ASCII Terminal/Printer, or SNMP Operation
Use the Dial command to set up a semipermanent connection to route alarm
messages to the specified destination. The Dial command initiates a call through
the integral modem to a printer, ASCII terminal, or PC.

Procedure
To initiate a call at the local DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Call.

Control:
Call
Rel
F1

LED
F3

4. From the Call Setup screen, select Dial. This selection is not available if the
DSU/CSU’s integral modem is already in use.

Call Setup:
Pass
Dial
F1

ChDir
F3

5. From the Dial Directory screen, press F1 (Up) to display the next higher
numbered directory or press F2 (Down) to select the next lower numbered
directory.

Dial n: xxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
F1

Dial
F3

6. When the number of the desired directory appears on the screen, press F3
(Dial) to place the call.

Dial n: xxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

Dial
F3

February 2001

3-59

3. Operation

Disconnecting the Modem Connection
The Disconnect command enables you to force a disconnect of an active modem
connection from the front panel of the DSU/CSU. This command is only available
when the DSU/CSU modem is connected.
Disconnect methods include:

Using the Disconnect command via the front panel menu (for all dial
connections, or when a pass-through connection is established to another
316x DSU/CSU).
Pressing and holding the
and
front panel keys simultaneously (when a
pass-through connection is established to a remote device other than a
316x DSU/CSU).

Procedure
To disconnect an established modem connection using the Disconnect command:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Call.

Control:
Call
F1

Rel

LED

4. From the Call Setup screen, select Disc.

Call Setup:
Disc
ChDir
F1

The modem call is disconnected and the Command Complete screen
appears.

Disconnect:
Command Complete
F1

3-60

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Procedure
To disconnect a modem connection using two front panel keys:
1. Press the

and

keys simultaneously and hold for two seconds.

Call Setup:
Disc
ChDir
F1

The modem call is disconnected and the Command Complete screen
appears.

Enabling the Communication Port for Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs
Communication between the carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs and an external PC,
ASCII device, SNMP manager, or async terminal interface (attached either locally
or through an external modem) occurs through a shared communication (COM)
port. (For COM port cabling information, refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series
Carrier Installation Manual.) Unlike standalone DSU/CSUs, the carrier-mounted
DSU/CSUs do not have a dedicated COM port for external access. Once the COM
port is enabled, other COM port configuration options can be selected. These
options are used to configure Port 2 on the Auxiliary Backplane as a COM port for
the carrier.

NOTE:
If a Model 3161 DSU/CSU has the COM port enabled, Port 2 cannot be used
as a data port.

Procedure
To enable the COM port on the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.

key until the User selection appears on the

February 2001

3-61

3. Operation

5. Select User.

Edit:
Chan
F1

Gen

User

6. Press F1 (Next) until the Com Port configuration option appears.
7. Select Enab to enable the COM port for the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU.

Com Port:
Next
Enab
F2

Disab
F3

The carrier COM port provides the following functionality:

If configured for ASCII, only one ASCII device may be used for the carrier. (If
two COM ports are configured for ASCII, neither will work.)
If configured for Mgmt, each device in the carrier can support an Mgmt COM
port; however, each Mgmt COM port must be connected to a different subnet.
To facilitate IP data routing, the device with the closest link to the SNMP
manager or Telnet client should be configured as the IP Bus Master.
If configured for either ASCII or Mgmt, the carrier COM port may be configured
to control an external device (e.g., modem, x.25 PAD) through the use of AT or
user-specified commands.

The set of valid characters for control of the carrier external COM port device is as
follows:

3-62

The numbers: 0–9
The lowercase letters: a–z
The uppercase letters: A–Z
The space (“ ”) character
The ASCII symbols (in ascending order, based on the ASCII code)
The End Of Line (EOL) symbol: ←
The caret (“^”) control character is used to select non-printable ASCII
characters. The caret “^” must be followed by one character which together
form the control sequence. Table 3-7, Control Sequence, defines all of the
available control sequences.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Table 3-7.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Control Sequence

Sequence

ASCII

HEX

^A or ^a

SOH

0x01

^B or ^b

STX

0x02

^C or ^c

ETX

0x03

^D or ^d

EOT

0x04

^E or ^e

ENQ

0x05

^F or ^f

ACK

0x06

^G or ^g

BEL

0x07

^H or ^h

0x08

^I or ^i

0x09

^J or ^j

LF or NL

0x0A

^K or ^k

0x0B

^L or ^l

FF or NP

0x0C

^M or ^m

0x0D

^N or ^n

0x0E

^O or ^o

0x0F

^P or ^p

DLE

0x10

^Q or ^q

DC1

0x11

^R or ^r

DC2

0x12

^S or ^s

DC3

0x13

^T or ^t

DC4

0x14

^U or ^u

NAK

0x15

^V or ^v

SYN

0x16

^W or ^w

ETB

0x17

^X or ^x

CAN

0x18

^Y or ^y

0x19

^Z or ^z

SUB

0x1A

ESC

0x1B

0x1C

0x1D

0x1E

0x1F

February 2001

3-63

3. Operation

Deactivating the Alarm Relay for Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs
The Alarm Cut-off command forces a deactivation of the alarm relay on the
3000 Series Carrier during an alarm condition. Since this function only affects the
3000 Series Carrier, it is only available for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs. The alarm
relay function must first be enabled by the Alarm Relay configuration option (refer
to Appendix C, Configuration Options).

Procedure
To deactivate the alarm relay:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select ACO.

Control:
ACO
F1

Rel
F2

LED
F3

4. The Command Complete screen appears.

Alarm Cut-Off:
Command Complete
F1

3-64

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

Resetting the DSU/CSU
Use the Reset command to perform a power-on reset of the DSU/CSU.

Procedure
To reset the DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
on the screen.

key until the Reset selection appears

4. Select Reset.

Control:
ClrReg
F1

Reset
F2

5. From the Device Reset screen, press F1 to initiate a reset of the DSU/CSU
(the power-up sequence screen appears). Press F2 instead to return to the
Control screen without initiating a reset.

Device Reset:
Yes
No
F1

Download Operations
NOTE:
The Download command is for use by service personnel only. Loss of primary
data could result from improper use.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-65

3. Operation

3-66

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

3. Operation

User Interface Access Security for Standalone DSU/CSUs
NOTE:
This page of the manual is self-supporting and can be removed to prevent
unwanted knowledge of the security access levels and their selection.
The user interface access security option allows you to limit access to the
DSU/CSU to display-only and non-intrusive functions. The user access security
function is not available for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Level 1 (Lvl1) access security allows access to all functions available through the
menu tree. This is the default setting.
Level 2 (Lvl2) access security restricts access to only those functions that cannot
affect the operation of the DSU/CSU in any way. At this level,

None of the functions in the Test or Ctrl branches are available.
All functions on the Stat branch are available.
All functions on the Cnfg branch are available for display, but they cannot be
used to save to a configuration area.

You can only reach the screen that controls security access using the front panel.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

3-67

3. Operation

Changing User Interface Access Security
Procedure
To change user interface access security:
1. Press the

key two times from the top-level screen.

Stat

DSU ESF
Test
F2

2. Press the

key three times.

Stat

DSU ESF
Test

Cnfig

3. Press the

Cnfig

key once.

Stat

DSU ESF
Test

Cnfig

The Security screen appears.

Security:
Lvl1
F1

Lvl2
F2

4. Press F1 to select Lvl1, or press F2 to select Lvl2. After you make a selection,
the top-level screen appears.
If you do not make a selection within 5 minutes, the Automatic Device
Health/Status screen appears.

3-68

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Maintenance

4
Overview
The DSU/CSU can detect and report faults, and perform diagnostic tests. These
features ensure that your DSU/CSU is giving you optimum performance in your
network.

Self-Test Health
Use the Self-Test Health command to display the results of the power-up self-test.
Possible messages are listed in Table 4-1, Self-Test Health Messages. See
Chapter 2, Installation, for more information about power-up self-test.

Procedure
To display power-up self-test results:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.

Stat

DSU ESF
Test

Cnfig
F3

2. From the Status screen, select STest.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Status:
DevHS

STest

Perf

February 2001

4-1

4. Maintenance

3. View the results of the last power-up self-test. If no problems were found
during power-up, the following message appears.

STest Health:
Passed
F1

Table 4-1.

4-2

Self-Test Health Messages

Message

Description

Passed

No problems were found during power-up.

CPU fail

The central processing unit failed internal testing.

Device fail

One or more of the unit’s integrated circuit chips failed to pass
internal device level testing.

B8ZS/LOS fail

The unit failed to encode data properly or to detect Loss Of
Signal.

Alarm fail

The unit failed to transmit AIS or to detect an Yellow alarm.

Memory fail

The unit failed program checksum verification.

LCD fail

The front panel liquid crystal display (LCD) failed.

NET T1 fail

The unit failed to internally loop data on the network T1 circuit.

DTE T1 fail

The unit failed to internally loop data on the DTE T1 (DSX-1)
circuit.

DSU fail

The unit failed to internally loop data on the DSU.

DSU Portn fail

Port’s integrated circuitry failed to pass device internal testing.

Modem fail

Unit failed to internally loop data through the modem circuit.

Unknown Exp Dev

The unit is not able to recognize the expansion device connected
to the main circuit card.

Failure xxxxxxxx

An 8-digit hexadecimal failure code is provided for service
personnel.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Device Health and Status
Use the Device Health and Status branch to view the current health and status
messages for the DSU/CSU. Table 4-2, Device Health and Status Messages, lists
these messages in priority order.

Procedure
To display device health and status:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
2. From the Status screen, select DevHS.

Status:
DevHS

STest

Perf
F3

Alarm/status messages appear on Line 2 of the LCD in priority order (highest
to lowest). The DSU/CSU is polled for current status every ten seconds. If the
status has changed from the last poll, the Health and Status screen is updated
and the highest priority message is displayed.
3. Use the scroll keys, if necessary, to scroll additional device health and status
messages onto the LCD.

Device H/S:
OOF at DTE
F1

The Auto Device Health and Status screen appears when there is no activity
(no keys pressed) on the active physical interface for five minutes. Only the
highest priority message appears on Line 2 of the LCD.

Auto Dev H/S
OOF at DTE
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-3

4. Maintenance

Table 4-2.

4-4

Device Health and Status Messages (1 of 2)

Message

Description

LOS at Net

A Loss Of Signal condition (175 consecutive zeros) has been
detected on the network interface. The condition is cleared when the
density of ones to zeros received is 12.5%.

LOS at DTE

A Loss Of Signal condition (175 consecutive zeros) has been
detected on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. The condition is
cleared when the density of ones to zeros received is 12.5%.

OOF at Net

An Out Of Frame condition (2 out of 4 frame synchronization bits in
error) has been detected on the network interface. The condition is
cleared when a reframe occurs.

OOF at DTE

An Out Of Frame condition has been detected on the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. The condition is cleared when a
reframe occurs.

AIS at Net

An Alarm Indication Signal (unframed all ones signal) is being
received by the network interface.

AIS at DTE

An Alarm Indication Signal is being received by the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.

EER at Net

An Excessive Error Rate condition has been detected on the
network interface (the bit error rate has exceeded the configured
threshold for ESF framing). The condition is cleared when the error
rate falls below the threshold value.

Yellow at Net

A Yellow Alarm signal is being received by the network interface.

Yellow at DTE

A Yellow Alarm signal is being received by the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.

OOF at Prtn

An Out Of Frame condition has been detected on data port Prtn
(where n is the port number). This condition only occurs if the
synchronous data port’s Embedded Data Link (EDL) is enabled (only
available for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs).

EER at Prtn

The error rate of the received signal has exceeded the configured
threshold for data port Prtn (where n is the port number). This
condition only occurs if the synchronous data port’s Embedded Data
Link (EDL) is enabled (only available for 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs). The condition is cleared when the error rate falls below
the synchronous data port’s configured threshold value.

PORT IP Down

The IP management link is in a down state for PORT (where PORT
is COM, MODEM, or AUX). This condition occurs if the PORT is
configured for Mgmt, and communication between the management
system and the DSU/CSU is not currently possible for this port. For
the AUX port, this condition is detected only when a device reset or
power-up occurs.

Selftest failed

A failure was detected during the power-on self-test. Select STest (in
the Stat branch) to display more information about the failure.

DevFail xxxxxxxx

An internal error has been detected by the operating software. An
8-digit code appears for use by service personnel. The condition is
cleared by resetting the device.

Download failed

A download attempt was interrupted and failed to complete. The
condition is cleared by resetting the device.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Table 4-2.

Device Health and Status Messages (2 of 2)

Message

Description

Test in progress

A test is currently active. Select Tstat (in the Stat branch) to display
more test information.

Modem
Connected

The integral modem is currently connected. This message is only
displayed for standalone DSU/CSUs.

Master Clk fail

The master clock has failed. Timing for the DSU/CSU is provided by
the internal clock.

DSU Operational

This message only appears if there are no valid alarm or status
messages.

Performance Reports
When the network interface is configured for ESF operation, network performance
is continuously monitored and maintained in two sets of aggregate registers:
Carrier Network Interface Registers (Telco) and User Network Interface Registers
(User). The User registers contain an extra status register (Status Event).
Registers shown on the front panel LCD are listed in Table 4-3, Performance
Registers. These registers are status registers that collect performance data for
the previous 24-hour period. Performance data is updated in 15-minute intervals.
After 15 minutes, the current interval is rolled over into a set of accumulator
registers that represent the previous 96 15-minute intervals for the register. An
interval total of how many of the 96 registers contain valid data is also kept, as well
as a 24-hour total for each accumulator register.
For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs, port performance is continuously monitored and
maintained in memory registers when the port is configured to use EDL. The
DSU/CSU maintains two sets of port registers for each synchronous data port:
far-end port registers and near-end port registers. These registers are status
registers that collect performance data for the previous 8-hour period. Port data is
updated in 15-minute intervals. After 15 minutes, the current interval is rolled over
into a set of accumulator registers that represent the previous 32 15-minute
intervals for the register. An interval total of how many of the 32 registers contain
valid data is also kept, as well as a 8-hour total for each accumulator register.

NOTE:
The following procedure is an example only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model and configuration of the DSU/CSU. The
procedures for displaying Telco and port registers are similar to this example.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-5

4. Maintenance

Procedure
To display User Network Interface (User) performance:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
2. From the Status screen, select Perf.

Status:
DevHS

STest

Perf

3. Select User registers.

Performance:
Telco
User

Prt1

4. From the User Registers screen, press F1 to view current registers (go to
Step 5), press F2 to view 24-Hour Totals (go to Step 6), or press F3 to view
15-Minute Interval Registers (go to Step 7).

User Registers:
Cur
24Tot
F1

Intvl
F3

5. When you press F1 from the User Registers screen, the User registers for the
current 15-minute interval appear.

User Current:
Event = xx,xxx
F1

6. When you press F2 from the User Registers screen, the User registers for the
24-hour total interval appear.

User 24 Hour:
VldIntvl = xx
F1

4-6

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

7. When you press F3 from the User Registers screen, the interval screen
appears. Use this screen to choose the specific 15-minute interval.

User Intvl: 01
Up
Down
F1

Dsply
F3

8. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the first or second digit in
the interval number displayed, then use the F1 (Up) and F2 (Down) keys to
increment/decrement the number.
9. When you have selected the number of the interval you want to display, press
F3 (Dsply) to display the registers for the interval selected. Use the scroll keys
to view additional register information.

User Intvl: xx
ES=xxx
F1

You can reset the performance registers via the ClrReg command in the Control
branch of the front panel menu.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-7

4. Maintenance

Procedure
To clear the performance registers:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
on the screen.

key until the ClrReg selection appears

4. Select ClrReg.

Control:
Rel
LED
F1

ClrReg
F3

5. From the Clear Prf Regs screen, press F1 to clear the User registers.

Clear Prf Regs:
User
Prt1
F1

Prt2
F3

If you selected User, the User performance registers are cleared, all
accumulators are reset to zero, and all status registers are cleared. The
current interval timer, the number of valid intervals count, and the total 24-hour
counts are reset to zero. The Command Complete message then appears.

4-8

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Table 4-3.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Performance Registers (1 of 2)

Interval Description

Totals Description

Event

ESF error events counter. An error
event is an ESF frame with either a
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
error or an Out Of Frame (OOF)
event. The maximum count is
65,535. This register is only reset
as a result of a reset command from
the network. This register is valid for
the current interval only.

N/A

CurTimer

Current interval timer. This register
records the number of seconds in
the current 15-minute interval. The
maximum is 900 seconds. This
register is valid for the current
interval only.

N/A

VldIntvl

N/A

Valid interval total. Records the
number of valid 15-minute intervals
in the previous x hours, where x is
24 hours for aggregate performance
and 8 hours for port performance.
This register is not valid for the
current interval.

The number of errored seconds for
the current interval. An errored
second is any second with one or
more ESF error events. The
maximum is 900 seconds.

The total number of errored seconds
for the previous x hours, where x is
24 hours for aggregate performance
and 8 hours for port performance.

UAS

The number of unavailable seconds
for the current interval. An
unavailable second is any one
second interval when service is
unavailable. (Detection occurs with
10 consecutive unavailable
seconds.) The maximum is
900 seconds.

The total number of unavailable
seconds for the previous x hours,
where x is 24 hours for aggregate
performance and 8 hours for port
performance.

SES

The number of severely errored
seconds for the current interval. A
severely errored second is any
second with 320 or more CRC
errors, or any second with one or
more OOF events. The maximum is
900 seconds.

The total number of severely errored
seconds for the previous x hours,
where x is 24 hours for aggregate
performance and 8 hours for port
performance.

BES

The number of bursty errored
seconds for the current interval. A
bursty errored second is any
second with more than one, but less
than 320, CRC errors. The
maximum is 900 seconds.

The total number of bursty errored
seconds for the previous x hours,
where x is 24 hours for aggregate
performance and 8 hours for port
performance.

February 2001

4-9

4. Maintenance

Table 4-3.

Performance Registers (2 of 2)

Interval Description

Totals Description

LOFC

The loss of frame count for the
current interval. This is a count of
the number of times that an LOF is
declared. The maximum count is
255.

The total loss of frame count for the
previous x hours, where x is
24 hours for aggregate performance
and 8 hours for port performance.

CSS
(Not valid
for Port
registers.)

The number of controlled slip
seconds for the current interval.

The total number of controlled slip
seconds for the previous x hours,
where x is 24 hours for aggregate
performance and 8 hours for port
performance.

StEvnt
(Only valid
for User
registers.)

The status events register records
whether one or more of the
following events have occurred at
least once during the interval. The
event is identified by a letter as
follows:

N/A

Y – A Yellow Alarm signal has
been received on the network
interface.
L – Loss Of Signal has occurred
on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface.
E – The Excessive Error Rate
threshold has been exceeded.
F – A Frame Synchronization Bit
Error has been detected.
V – A Bipolar Violation has been
detected.
If none of these events occurred
during the interval, StEvnt=none
will be displayed.
Complete
(Only valid
for far-end
port
registers.)

4-10

Bad line conditions or loopback
tests may prevent far-end port
statistics from reaching the
DSU/CSU. This field indicates
whether the 15-minute interval
contains 900 seconds of statistics.
If one or more seconds of far-end
statistics are missing, this field will
display Complete=No, otherwise it
will display Complete=Yes. This
field is only displayed when Far is
selected from the Prtn screen.

February 2001

N/A

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Alarms
The DSU/CSU can be attached, either locally or remotely, to an ASCII terminal or
printer to display or print alarm messages. Alarms can also be displayed on a PC
that is using a terminal emulation package.
For standalone DSU/CSUs, you can route these alarms to the MODEM port, the
COM port, or both. For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, you can route them to the
COM port or dial them out using an external device.
Each alarm message contains a customer identification to indicate which remote
DSU/CSU is reporting an alarm. For information about customer identification,
refer to Displaying Unit Identity in Chapter 3, Operation.
Possible alarm messages are as follows:

3160-A2-GB21-90

Continuous Loss Of Signal detected at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Cleared. Loss Of Signal condition at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Continuous Out Of Frame condition detected at the x
Interface (where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Cleared. Out Of Frame condition at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Indication Signal received at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Cleared. Alarm Indication Signal at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
An Excessive Error Rate has been detected at the Network
Interface.
Alarm Cleared. An Excessive Error Rate at the Network
Interface.
Yellow Alarm signal received at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Cleared. Yellow Alarm signal at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Continuous Out Of Frame condition detected at synchronous
data port n (where n is the port number).
Alarm Cleared. Out Of Frame condition at synchronous data
port n (where n is the port number).
An Excessive Error Rate has been detected at synchronous
data port n (where n is the port number).
Alarm Cleared. An Excessive Error Rate at synchronous data
port n (where n is the port number).

February 2001

4-11

4. Maintenance

If two alarm conditions are detected at once, the higher priority alarm is reported.
However, if an even higher priority alarm is detected before the first alarm is
cleared, the later alarm is not reported. (The alarms listed above are in priority
order with the highest priority listed first.)
Alarms remain active until the alarm condition is cleared. Also, an alarm clear
message is only sent when there are no other alarms active.
For information about alarm configuration options, refer to Alarm Configuration
Options in Appendix C, Configuration Options.
For troubleshooting information, refer to Troubleshooting on page 4-14.

SNMP Traps
SNMP traps are unsolicited messages that are sent from the DSU/CSU to an
SNMP manager when the DSU/CSU detects certain pre-specified conditions.
These traps enable the SNMP manager to monitor the state of the network.
The SNMP Trap configuration option must be enabled for trap messages to be
sent over the communications link. You must specify the number of SNMP
managers that are to receive traps from this DSU/CSU, an IP address for each
SNMP manager specified, and the type of traps to be sent from this DSU/CSU. For
more information, refer to Appendix C, Configuration Options, and Configuring
SNMP Traps in Chapter 3, Operation.
Trap types consist of the following:

4-12

General traps – Include warmStart and authenticationFailure. The DSU/CSU
sends a warmStart trap after it has been reset to indicate that it has just
reinitialized itself. The DSU/CSU sends an authenticationFailure trap when it
has received an SNMP protocol message that has not been properly
authenticated. These traps are set by the Gen Trap configuration option.
Enterprise Specific traps – Signify that the DSU/CSU has recognized an
enterprise-specific event. See Table 4-4, Enterprise-Specific Trap Definitions,
for enterprise-specific traps. These traps are set by the Entp Trap configuration
option.
Link Traps – Identify the condition of the communications interface, either
linkDown (one of the communications interfaces has failed) or linkUp (one of
the communications interfaces has just come up). These traps are set by the
Link Trap configuration option. The communications interfaces for which these
traps can be generated are specified by the Trap I/F configuration option.
Table 4-5, SNMP Trap per Interface, defines traps for each interface.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Table 4-4.

Enterprise-Specific Trap Definitions

Trap Value

Event

enterpriseClockFail(1)

The currently configured master clock source has failed.

enterpriseSelfTestFail(2)

A DSU/CSU hardware failure is detected at self-test. This
trap is generated after DSU/CSU initialization.

enterpriseDeviceFail(3)

An internal DSU/CSU failure is detected by the operating
software.

enterpriseTestStart(5)

A test is initiated.

enterpriseConfigChange(6)

A configuration option is changed.

enterpriseTestClear(105)

A test is concluded.

Table 4-5.

SNMP Trap per Interface

Interface

Trap Meaning

T1 Network

Up = No alarm or test conditions.
Down = Alarm or test conditions.

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)

Up = No alarm or test conditions, and the interface is
enabled.
Down = Alarm or test conditions, or the interface is
disabled.

Synchronous Data Ports

Up = No test conditions, the port is assigned to a network
interface, and both CTS and DSR are ON.
Down = Test conditions, the port is unassigned, or either
CTS or DSR is off.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-13

4. Maintenance

Troubleshooting
The DSU/CSU is designed to provide you with trouble-free service. However,
Table 4-6, Troubleshooting, gives you some direction if a problem occurs.
For problems other than those listed in the table, please contact your service
representative.
Table 4-6.

Troubleshooting (1 of 3)

Symptom

Possible Cause

Solutions

No power

1. The power module is not
securely attached.

1. Check the power module
attachment.

2. The wall receptacle has no
power.

2. Check the wall receptacle
power by plugging in some
equipment that is known to be
working.

Power-Up
Self-Test fails

The DSU/CSU has detected an
internal hardware failure.

Contact your service
representative.

Message LOS at
NET appears

1. Network cable problem.

1. Check that the network cable
is securely attached at both
ends.

2. No signal is being transmitted
at the far-end.

2. Check the far-end status.

3. Facility problem.

3. Contact your facility provider.

1. DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
cable problem.

1. Check that the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) cable is
securely attached at both
ends.

2. No signal being transmitted
from the DTE.

2. Check the DTE status.

1. Incompatible framing format
between the network and the
DSU/CSU.

1. Check that the framing format
for the network interface is
correct.

2. Network cabling problem.

2. Check that the network cable
is securely attached at both
ends.

3. Facility problem.

3. Contact your facility provider.

1. Incompatible framing format
between the Drop/Insert port
on the customer premises
equipment and the
DSU/CSU.

1. Check that the framing format
for the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface is correct.

2. DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
cabling problem.

2. Check that the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) cable is
securely attached at both
ends.

Message LOS at
DTE appears

Message OOF at
Net appears

Message OOF at
DTE appears

4-14

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Table 4-6.

Troubleshooting (2 of 3)

Symptom

Possible Cause

Solutions

Message
Yellow at Net
appears

1. Network cable problem.

1 Check that your network cable
is securely attached at both
ends.

2. Far-end device has lost
framing sync on the line.

2. Check the status of the far-end
device.

3. Facility problem.

3. Contact your facility provider.

Message
Yellow at DTE
appears

DTE has detected an LOS or
LOF condition.

1. Check the status of the DTE.

Message
AIS at Net
appears

1. Upstream device is
transmitting an AIS.

1. Check the status of the
upstream device(s).

2. The network is transmitting
an AIS.

2. Contact your facility provider.

Message
AIS at DTE
appears

DTE is sending an AIS.

Check the DTE.

Message EER at
Net appears

Facility problem.

Contact your facility provider.

BPV LED is ON

1. Incompatible line coding
format between the DTE and
the DSU/CSU.

1. Check that the line coding
format for the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface is correct.

2. DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
cable problem.

2. Check that the DTE cable is
securely attached at both
ends.

A failure message
appears followed
by an 8-digit code
(x x x x x x x x )

Internal DSU/CSU problem.

Record the 8-digit code, then
contact your service
representative.

Mgmt link is down

1. The manager configuration is
mismatched with the
DSU/CSU configuration.

1. Check that the configurations
are matched.

2. The manager’s link layer
protocol is not running.

2. Start the link layer protocol.

1. Cable problem.

1. Check that the cable is
securely attached at both
ends.

2. The link layer protocol is not
running.

2. Change the Aux Use
configuration option to None,
and then back to SNMP or
Daisy (as appropriate).

The modem cannot dial because
the phone number is invalid or
there is no number in the
selected directory.

Check that the selected phone
number is correct.

No SNMP
communication via
the AUX port

Invalid Number

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

2. Check that the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) cable is
securely attached at both
ends.

4-15

4. Maintenance

Table 4-6.

4-16

Troubleshooting (3 of 3)

Symptom

Possible Cause

Solutions

No Dial Tone

The modem cannot dial because
there is no dial tone.

Check that the modem is
connected properly.

Busy Signal

The modem is receiving a busy
signal.

Redial the phone number later.

No Answer Tone

The remote end does not
answer within 45 seconds.

Redial the phone number later.

Modem In Use

The modem is in use.

Redial the phone number later.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Test Jacks
For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs, six test jacks are located on the front panel
(Figure 4-1, Test Jacks (Standalone DSU/CSU)). The Mon (Monitor) branch of the
menu tree allows you to select either EQPT (Equipment) or NET (Network).
The 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSU test jack functions are shown in Figure 4-2, Test
Jack Block Diagram, and described in Table 4-7, Test Jack Functions.

NET

MON

EQPT

Out

Out
496-14808

Figure 4-1.

Test Jacks (Standalone DSU/CSU)

Procedure
To change the Mon (Monitor) selection in 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs:
1. From the top-level menu, press the
the screen.

key until the Ctrl selection appears on

2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Mon selection appears on

4. Select Mon.

Control:
Passwd Mon
F1

5. From the Mon Jack screen, press F1 to select EQPT (the default), or press F2
to select NET.

Mon Jack: EQPT
EQPT
NET
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-17

4. Maintenance

EQPT NET
In
Out

MON
In
Mon Jack: EQPT

Mon Jack: NET
(Selectable)

TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT
(DTE)

INTERNAL
CIRCUITRY

LINE
RECEIVER

NETWORK

(Selectable)
Mon Jack: EQPT

EQPT NET
In
Out

MON
Out

Figure 4-2.

Table 4-7.

4-18

Mon Jack: NET

496-14875

Test Jack Block Diagram

Test Jack Functions

Test Jack Name

Function

NET In
(Network In)

A break-in test jack that allows a signal to be inserted toward
the network by external test equipment.

NET Out
(Network Out)

A break-in test jack that interrupts the signal coming from the
network and allows it to be terminated by the external test
equipment.

EQPT In
(Equipment In)

A break-in test jack that allows a signal to be inserted toward
the terminal equipment (DTE) by external test equipment.

EQPT Out
(Equipment Out)

A break-in test jack that interrupts the signal coming from the
terminal equipment (DTE) and allows it to be terminated by the
external test equipment.

MON In
(Monitor In)

A monitor jack that is controlled by the Mon (Monitor) branch of
the menu tree. If it is set to EQPT (the default), this jack
monitors the signal going into the terminal equipment (DTE). If
it is set to NET, this jack monitors the signal going into the
network.

MON Out
(Monitor Out)

A monitor jack that is controlled by the Mon (Monitor) branch of
the menu tree. If it is set to EQPT (the default), this jack
monitors the signal coming from the terminal equipment
(DTE). If it is set to NET, this jack monitors the signal coming
from the network.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Test Commands
The test commands enable you to run loopbacks and test patterns on the
DSU/CSU, and to test the front panel LEDs. These tests can help you isolate
areas of trouble if you are having problems with your DSU/CSU.
To access all Test commands from the Test branch, press F2 to select Test from
the top-level menu screen.

Stat
F1

DSU ESF
Test
F2

Cnfig
F3

Remote Loopback Tests
The Remote Loopback tests enable you to troubleshoot your circuit by sending the
following to a far-end device:
For Networks

Line loopback up activation sequence for 10 seconds (LLBUP)
Line loopback down activation sequence for 10 seconds (LLBDN)

For Channels

V.54 activation sequence to initiate a V.54 Loop 2 (54UP)
V.54 deactivation sequence to terminate a V.54 Loop (54DN)
ANSI T1.403 (Annex B) activation sequence to initiate a DCLB on the remote
device (FT1UP)
ANSI T1.403 (Annex B) deactivation sequence to terminate a DCLB on the
remote device (FT1DN)

You cannot perform remote loopbacks if any of the local loopbacks are active. If
you attempt to do so, the error message Invld Test Combo (Invalid Test
Combination) appears.

NOTE:
The following procedures are examples only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model and configuration of the DSU/CSU.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-19

4. Maintenance

Sending a Line Loopback Up or Down
Procedure
To send a Line Loopback Up or Down sequence on the network to a far-end
DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Rlpbk.

Test:
Rlpbk

Lpbk

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Rem Loopback screen, press F1 to select LLBUP (Line Loopback
Up), or press F2 to select LLBDN (Line Loopback Down).

Rem Loopback:
LLBUP LLBDN
F1

54UP
F3

The Line Loopback sequence is sent up or downstream to the far-end
DSU/CSU for 10 seconds. During this time, Sending appears on Line 2 of the
LCD, followed by Command Complete when 10 seconds have elapsed.
You can press any function key to restore the Rem Loopback screen without
affecting transmission of the loopback code.

4-20

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Sending a V.54/ANSI FT1 Activation/Deactivation
Procedure
To send a V.54 or ANSI FT1 Activation or Deactivation loopback sequence to the
far-end DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Rlpbk.

Test:
Rlpbk
F1

Lpbk
F2

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Rem Loopback screen, press the function key that corresponds to
the specific loopback test you want to perform. Use the scroll keys, if
necessary.

Rem Loopback:
LLBUP LLBDN
F1

54UP
F3

The Rem Loop screen appears.

Rem Loop: Type
Prt1
Prt2
Prt3
F1

The 54UP, 54DN, FT1UP, and FT1DN commands send the requested
sequence out the network interface on the DS0 channels allocated to the port
you select here.
4. From the Rem Loop screen, press the desired function key to select the
specific port. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
After you select a port, the sequence is sent to the far-end DSU/CSU. During
this time, Sending appears on Line 2 of the LCD, followed by Command
Complete when the sequence is complete.
During the Sending message, you can press the
affecting transmission of the loopback sequence.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

and

keys without

4-21

4. Maintenance

Local Loopback Tests
The Local Loopback tests enable you to conduct circuit testing and fault isolation
for the digital line. The supported local loopback tests are:

Line Loopback (LLB)
Payload Loopback (PLB)
DTE Loopback (DLB)
Repeater Loopback (RLB)
Data Channel Loopback (DCLB)
Data Terminal Loopback (DTLB)

NOTE:
DLB does not appear when the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is disabled.
The Line Loopback command can be activated and deactivated in response to
commands received over the network interface. The Network Interface
configuration option NET LLB controls whether the DSU/CSU responds to the
commands transmitted on the network interface to initiate LLBs (see Appendix C,
Configuration Options).
The data port configuration option NET DCLB controls whether the DSU/CSU
responds to inband V.54 commands to initiate DCLB for that port (see Appendix C,
Configuration Options).
Local loopback tests can be aborted (Abort Command) at any time.
No more than two local loopbacks can be active at any one time. An additional
restriction prohibits certain loopbacks from running at the same time. Valid
loopback combinations listed in Table 4-8, Valid Loopback Combinations, are
identified by YES.
Table 4-8.

4-22

Valid Loopback Combinations

LLB

PLB

DLB

RLB

DCLB

DTLB

LLB

N/A

YES

PLB

N/A

YES

DLB

YES

N/A

YES

RLB

YES

N/A

YES

DCLB NO

YES

YES
(on separate ports)

DTLB YES

YES

YES
(on separate ports)

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Starting a Line Loopback
The Line Loopback command (LLB) loops the received signal on the network
interface back to the network without change.

DSU

CSU
NETWORK
LLB INTERFACE

DTE ALL
(DSX-1) 1s

ALL 1s

PORT 2

PORT 1

496-14319-02

Procedure
To perform a Line loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.

Test:
Rlpbk

Lpbk

Ptrns

3. From the Loopback screen, select LLB.

Loopback:
Abort
LLB
F1

PLB
F3

Test Started appears on Line 2. If a line loopback is already in progress,
the Already Active message appears. If an invalid combination of
loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Combo appears
(see Table 4-8, Valid Loopback Combinations, for valid loopback test
combinations).

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-23

4. Maintenance

Starting a Payload Loopback
The Payload Loopback command (PLB) loops the received signal on the network
interface back to the network. The signal is looped back as close to the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port as possible (after it has passed through the framing
circuitry of the DSU/CSU). Framing CRCs and BPVs are corrected.

DSU

CSU
PLB NETWORK
INTERFACE

DTE ALL
(DSX-1) 1s

ALL 1s

PORT 2

PORT 1

496-14316-02

Procedure
To perform a Payload loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.

Test:
Rlpbk
F1

Lpbk
F2

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Loopback screen, select PLB.

Loopback:
Abort
LLB

PLB

Test Started appears on Line 2. If a Payload loopback is already in
progress, the Already Active message appears. If an invalid combination
of loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Combo appears
(see Table 4-8, Valid Loopback Combinations, for valid loopback test
combinations).

4-24

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Starting a DTE Loopback
The DTE Loopback command (DLB) loops the received signal on the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port back to the DTE without change.

DSU
DTE DLB
(DSX-1)

CSU
NETWORK
INTERFACE

ALL 1s

PORT 2

496-14317-02

PORT 1

Procedure
To perform a DTE loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.

Test:
Rlpbk
F1

Lpbk
F2

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Loopback screen, press the
on the screen.

key until the DLB selection appears

4. Select DLB.

Loopback:
LLB
PLB
F1

DLB
F3

Test Started appears on Line 2. If a DTE loopback is already in progress,
the Already Active message appears. If an invalid combination of
loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Combo appears
(see Table 4-8, Valid Loopback Combinations, for valid loopback test
combinations).

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-25

4. Maintenance

Starting a Repeater Loopback
The Repeater Loopback command (RLB) loops the signal being sent to the
network back to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) and data ports. The signal is looped
back as close to the network interface as possible (after it has passed through the
framing circuitry of the DSU/CSU). Framing CRCs and BPVs are corrected.

DSU

CSU

DTE
(DSX-1)

NETWORK
INTERFACE
ALL 1s

RLB

PORT 1

496-14318-02

PORT 2

Procedure
To perform a Repeater loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.

Test:
Rlpbk
F1

Lpbk
F2

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Loopback screen, press the
on the screen.

key until the RLB selection appears

4. Select RLB.

Loopback:
PLB
DLB

RLB

Test Started appears on Line 2. If a Repeater loopback is already in
progress, the Already Active message appears. If an invalid combination
of loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Combo appears
(see Table 4-8, Valid Loopback Combinations, for valid loopback test
combinations).

4-26

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Starting a Data Channel Loopback
The Data Channel Loopback command (DCLB) loops the data received from the
network interface, for all DS0 channels allocated to the selected port, back to the
network. The loopback occurs after the data passes through the port circuitry but
before it is sent out the data port.

DSU

CSU
NETWORK
INTERFACE

DTE
(DSX-1)
DCLB

DCLB

ALL 1s

PORT 2

PORT 1

496-14315-02

Procedure
To perform a Data Channel loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.

Test:
Rlpbk
F1

Lpbk
F2

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Loopback screen, press the
appears on the screen.

key until the DCLB selection

4. Select DCLB.

Loopback:
DLB
RLB
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

DCLB
F3

February 2001

4-27

4. Maintenance

5. From the DCLB screen, press the Function key for the port for which you want
to perform the data channel loopback. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.

Loopback: DCLB
Prt1
Prt2
Prt3
F2

Test Started appears on Line 2. If a Data Channel loopback is already in
progress, the Already Active message appears. If an invalid combination
of loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Combo appears
(see Table 4-8, Valid Loopback Combinations, for valid loopback test
combinations).

Starting a Data Terminal Loopback
The Data Terminal Loopback command (DTLB) loops the data received from the
selected port, for all DS0 channels allocated to the port, back out of the port. This
loopback occurs after the data passes through the port circuitry but before it
reaches the T1 framer.

DSU

CSU
ALL 1s

DTE
(DSX-1)

DTLB

PORT 2

PORT 1

NETWORK
INTERFACE

496-14314-02

Procedure
To perform a Data Terminal loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.

Test:
Rlpbk
F1

Lpbk
F2

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Loopback screen, press the
on the screen.

4-28

February 2001

key until the DTLB selection appears

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

4. Select DTLB.

Loopback:
RLB
DCLB
F1

DTLB
F3

5. From the DTLB screen, press the Function key for the port for which you want
to perform the data terminal loopback. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.

Loopback: DTLB
Prt1
Prt2
F1

Prt3
F3

Test Started appears on Line 2. If a Data Terminal loopback is already in
progress, the Already Active message appears. If an invalid combination
of loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Combo appears
(see Table 4-8, Valid Loopback Combinations, for valid loopback test
combinations).

Aborting Loopbacks
The Abort Loopback command stops all loopback tests or any selected loopback
test currently active on the DSU/CSU.

Procedure
To abort one or more loopback tests:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.

Test:
Rlpbk

Lpbk

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Loopback screen, select Abort.

Loopback:
Abort
LLB

PLB

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-29

4. Maintenance

4. From the Loopback Abort screen, press the desired Function key to abort All
or one specific loopback test. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.

Loopback: Abort
All
LLB
F1

PLB
F3

If you select ALL, LLB, PLB, DLB, or RLB, skip Step 5.
5. From the Abort screen, press the Function key that corresponds to the port for
which you want to abort the test. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.

Abort: Test Name
Prt1
Prt2
Prt3
F1

When abort is complete, the message Command Complete appears on the
Abort screen.

NOTE:
If you mistakenly choose to abort a loopback test that is not currently running,
a Command Complete message will still display and the loopback that is
currently active will still be running. Use the TStat branch to view the test
status to determine if the abort was successful.

Test Patterns
Use the Test Pattern commands to send, monitor, and abort test patterns.
Available test patterns are:

4-30

QRSS – A quasi-random signal source approximating live data that can be
monitored for logic errors (on the network and the data ports).
1-in-8 – A test pattern consisting of a one (1) followed by seven zeros (on the
network only).
511 – A pseudo-random bit sequence (PRBS) that is 511 bits long (on the
data ports only). This is a PRBS 29–1 test.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Sending Test Patterns
Use the Send command to start transmission of a test pattern.
Only one test pattern can be active at a time on one port. Table 4-9, Valid Send
Test Pattern Combinations, lists the valid send test pattern combinations. Valid
combinations are identified by YES.

Procedure
To send a test pattern:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Ptrns.

Test:
Rlpbk
F1

Lpbk
F2

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Patterns screen, select Send.

Patterns:
Abort
Send
F1

Mon
F3

4. From the Patterns Send screen, press F1 to send a QRSS pattern, F2 to send
a 1-in-8 pattern, F3 to send a 511 pattern.

Patterns: Send
QRSS
1in8
F1

511
F3

If you send a 1-in-8 pattern, skip Step 5.
5. From the Send screen, press the Function key that corresponds to network or
the port for which you want to send a test pattern. Use the scroll keys, if
necessary. (NET does not appear for the 511 pattern.)

Send: Name
NET
Prt1
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

Prt2
F3

February 2001

4-31

4. Maintenance

The Test Started screen appears.

Send: Name and Dest
Test Started
F1

If the DSU/CSU is already sending the test pattern you selected, the message
Already active appears. If you selected an incompatible test pattern
combination, the message Invld Test Combo appears. See Table 4-9,
Valid Send Test Pattern Combinations, for valid combinations.
Table 4-9.

4-32

Valid Send Test Pattern Combinations
QRSS
(Network)

QRSS (Port)

1-in8
(Network)

511 (Port)

QRSS
(Network)

N/A

QRSS (Port)

YES (on
separate ports)

N/A

YES (on
separate ports)

1 in 8
(Network)

N/A

511 (Port)

N/A

YES (on
separate ports)

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Monitoring Test Patterns
Use the Monitor command to monitor a QRSS test pattern over all the channels on
the network interface, or to monitor QRSS or 511 test patterns on the channels
allocated to an individual port.
This command provides the number of errors detected in the test pattern (5 digits,
maximum 99999).

Procedure
To monitor a QRSS or 511 test pattern:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Ptrns.
Test:
Rlpbk
F1

Lpbk
F2

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Patterns screen, select Mon.
Patterns:
Abort
Send
F1

Mon
F3

4. From the Patterns Mon screen, press F1 for QRSS or F2 for 511.
Patterns: Mon
QRSS
511
F1

5. From the Monitor screen, press the Function key that corresponds to network
or the port for which you want to send a test pattern. Use the scroll keys, if
necessary. (NET does not appear for the 511 pattern.
Monitor: Name
NET
Prt1
F1

Prt2
F3

The Monitor screen appears with the error count. If the maximum of 99999 is
exceeded, OvrFlw appears instead of the count. If the receiver loses
synchronization while the monitor is active, No Sync appears.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-33

4. Maintenance

Aborting Test Patterns
Use the Abort command to stop all test patterns or any selected test pattern active
on the DSU/CSU.

Procedure
To abort test patterns:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Ptrns.

Test:
Rlpbk

Lpbk

Ptrns
F3

3. From the Patterns screen, select Abort.

Patterns:
Abort
Send
F1

Mon
F3

4. From the Patterns Abort screen, press the desired Function key to abort either
All active test patterns, active Send test patterns, or the active Monitor (Mon)
test pattern.

Patterns: Abort
All
Send
F1

Mon
F3

If you select All, the DSU/CSU terminates all active test patterns and displays
the message Command Complete. Skip Step 5.

NOTE:
If you mistakenly choose to abort a test pattern that is not currently
running, a Command Complete message still displays and the test
pattern currently active still runs. Use the TStat branch to view the test
status to determine if the abort was successful.

4-34

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

5. From the Abort screen, press the Function key that corresponds to the
network or port for which you want to abort a test pattern. Use the scroll keys,
if necessary.

Abort: Send or Mon
NET
Prt1
Prt2
F1

The DSU/CSU terminates the selected test pattern and displays the message
Command Complete.

Lamp Test
Use the Lamp Test commands to start and stop a test of the DSU/CSU front panel
LCD and LEDs.

Starting a Lamp Test
Procedure
To start a Lamp test:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, press the
the screen.

key until the Lamp selection appears on

3. From the Test screen, select Lamp.

Test:
Lpbk
F1

Ptrns
F2

Lamp
F3

4. From the Lamp Test screen, select Start.

Lamp Test:
Abort
Start
F1

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-35

4. Maintenance

5. The following screens alternately appear on the LCD until you press a
Function key to return to the Lamp Test screen. In addition, all LEDs blink.

❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚
❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚
F2

0123456789 : ; < = > ?
@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
F2

6. When you are satisfied that all LEDs are lighting and the LCD is functioning
properly, abort the Lamp test from the Lamp Test screen. If there is no activity
on the DSU/CSU front panel for five minutes, the Device Health and Status
screen appears automatically. However, the Lamp test remains active until it is
aborted.

Aborting a Lamp Test
Procedure
To abort the Lamp test:
1. Display the Lamp Test screen. To do this when the LCD is alternating the
Lamp test screens, press any Function key. Otherwise, follow Steps 1
through 3 for starting a Lamp test.

Lamp Test:
Abort
Start
F1

2. From the Lamp Test screen, select Abort.

Lamp Test:
Abort
Start
F1

4-36

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

4. Maintenance

Displaying DSU/CSU Test Status
Use the Test Status command to display the active tests for the DSU/CSU. Status
messages that can display on the front panel LCD are listed in Table 4-10, Test
Status Message.

Procedure
To display test status:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
2. From the Status screen, press the
the screen.

key until the TStat selection appears on

3. Select TStat.

Status:
STest
F1

Perf
F2

TStat
F3

The Test Status screen appears showing you what tests are active for the
DSU/CSU.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

4-37

4. Maintenance

Table 4-10. Test Status Message

4-38

Message

Description

No Test Active

No tests are currently active.

LLB Test Active

The network interface is in Line loopback.

PLB Test Active

The network interface is in Payload loopback.

DLB Test Active

The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port is in DTE loopback.

RLB Test Active

The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port is in Repeater loopback.

DCLB on Port n

Port n is in a Data Channel loopback.

DTLB on Port n

Port n is in a Data Terminal loopback.

QRSS on Net

A QRSS test pattern is being sent on the network interface.

1–8 Test Active

A 1-in-8 test pattern is being sent on the network interface.

QRSS on Port n

A QRSS test pattern is being sent to the network on the channels
allocated to port n.

511 on Port n

A 511 test pattern is being sent to the network on the channels
allocated to port n.

Mon QRSS, Net

A QRSS test pattern is being monitored on the network interface.

Mon QRSS, Port n

A QRSS test pattern is being monitored on the channels
allocated to port n.

Mon 511, Port n

A 511 test pattern is being monitored on the channels allocated to
port n.

DLB Test, Extrn

The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port is being held in DTE loopback
by the external contact.

Lamp Test Active

The Lamp test is currently active.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Front Panel Menu

A
DSU ESF

Test

Stat
DevHS STest Perf TStat LED
Telco

Prtn

User

Near

Ctrl

Cnfig

Rel

Call

T1 Prtn
Rlpbk

Far

LED

ACO
▲

Lpbk

Ptrns

Abort

Send

Pass Dial Disc ChDir
●

Mon

1 . . 5,A
(Directory)

QRSS 511
LLBUP LLBDN 54UP 54DN FT1UP FT1DN

ClrReg

CID

Mon

DL
EQPT NET

Lamp

Cur 24Tot Intvl
Cur 8Tot Intvl

Reset Passwd

QRSS 1in8 511

User Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4

Near

Far

DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4

Abort LLB PLB DLB RLB DCLB DTLB
Load Edit Area From:
Activ

Cust1 Cust2 Fact1

Fact2

Choose Function:
Save

Edit

Activ Cust1 Cust2
DTE

Copy

Prt1

Port

Prt2

Prt3

NET

Chan

Gen

User

Prt4

Alarm

Mgmt

Gen Trap

Port Select :

All

Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4

Dsply Clear DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4

▲ For Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs only
● For Standalone DSU/CSUs only
For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs only

3160-A2-GB21-90

496-14945

February 2001

A-1

A. Front Panel Menu

A-2

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Technical Specifications

B
Overview
The technical specifications for the standalone DSU/CSUs are listed in Table B-1,
Models 3160/3164/3165/DSU/CSU’s Technical Specifications. The technical
specifications for the carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs are listed in the ACCULINK
3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide.
Table B-1.

Models 3160/3164/3165/DSU/CSU’s Technical Specifications

Specifications

Criteria

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Typical:
AC Power Module

Refer to the labeling on the ac power module for input
requirements

Optional:
+24 Vdc

+20 Vdc to +32 Vdc, 0.50A

–48 Vdc

–38 Vdc to –60 Vdc, 0.25A

–48 Vdc Redundant

–38 Vdc to –60 Vdc, 0.25A

POWER CONSUMPTION
AND DISSIPATION

3160:
6.5 watts, 22.1 Btu per hour at +24 Vdc;
6.2 watts, 21.3 Btu per hour at –48 Vdc
8.7 watts, 29.7 Btu per hour at 100 Vac (includes
external transformer)
9.2 watts, 31.4 Btu per hour at 120 Vac (includes
external transformer)
3164, 3165:
12.0 watts, 41 Btu per hour at +24 and -48 Vdc
16.0 watts, 55.0 Btu per hour at 115 Vac (includes
external transformer)

ENVIRONMENT
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity Shock and
Vibration

3160-A2-GB21-90

32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5%—95% (noncondensing)
Withstands normal shipping and handling

February 2001

B-1

B. Technical Specifications

Table B-1.

Models 3160/3164/3165/DSU/CSU’s Technical Specifications

Specifications

Criteria

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
Height

Model 3160 or 3165 DSU/CSU = 2.13 inches (5.4 cm)
Model 3164 DSU/CSU = 3.90 inches (10.0 cm)

Width
Depth

7.63 inches (19.4 cm)
12.13 inches (30.8 cm)

WEIGHT

Model 3160 DSU/CSU = 2.6 pounds (1.2 kg)
Model 3164 DSU/CSU = 3.6 pounds (1.7 kg)
Model 3165 DSU/CSU = 2.4 pounds (1.1 kg)

DTE DROP/INSERT
(DSX-1) INTERFACE
(Models 3160/3164)
DB15 socket
D4, ESF
AMI, B8ZS
5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet
(0 to 196.5 meters)
Selectable

Physical Interface
Framing Format
Coding Format
DTE Line Equalization
Send AIS
NETWORK T1 INTERFACE
Physical Interface (USA)
Physical Interface (Canada)
Framing Format
Coding Format
Line Build-Out (LBO)
ANSI PRM
Bit Stuffing
Yellow Alarm Generation

RJ48C
CA81A using adapter cable
D4, ESF
AMI, B8ZS
0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15 dB, –22.5 dB
Selectable
FCC Part 68, AT&T TR 62411
Selectable

LOOPBACKS
Standard Additional

AT&T TR 54016, AT&T TR 62411, ANSI T1.403.1989
RLB (Repeater Loopback), DLB (DTE Loopback),
V.54 Loop 2 and Loop 3, ANSI T1.403 Annex B
Fractional T1 Loopback

PORT INTERFACE
Standards
Rates

EIA-530-A, V.35, RS-449, X.21
Nx64 – 64K–1.536 Mb
Nx56 – 56K–1.344 Mb

APPROVALS

Refer to the product labeling

CLOCKING SOURCES

T1 network interface, Port 1, internal clock, or (for
Models 3160/3164 DSU/CSUs) DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface or external clock

MODEM INTERFACE
Physical Interface
Rate
Integral Dial Modem

B-2

RJ11C (USA), CA11A (Canada)
2400 bps
V.22

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Configuration Options

C
Overview
The DSU/CSU configuration option tables contain a list of all configuration options
and their available selections. The configuration options are arranged into
functional groups:

DTE Interface Configuration Options
The DTE Interface configuration options configure the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface on the DSU/CSU (Table C-1, DTE Interface Configuration
Options).

Port Configuration Options
The Port configuration options configure the synchronous data ports on the
DSU/CSU (Table C-2, Port Configuration Options).

Network Interface Configuration Options
The Network Interface configuration options configure the network interface on
the DSU/CSU (Table C-3, Network Interface Configuration Options).

Channel Configuration Options
The Channel configuration options configure the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) and
synchronous data port channel allocations on the DSU/CSU (Table C-4, DTE
Channel Configuration Options, and Table C-5, Data Port Channel
Configuration Options)

General Configuration Options
The General configuration options configure alarms and clocks on the
DSU/CSU (Table C-6, General Configuration Options).

User Interface Configuration Options
The User Interface configuration options configure and control the DSU/CSU
user interfaces (Table C-7, User Interface Configuration Options).

Alarm Configuration Options
The Alarm configuration options specify how alarm conditions are handled by
the DSU/CSU (Table C-8, Alarm Configuration Options).

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-1

C. Configuration Options

Management Configuration Options
The Management configuration options configure the DSU/CSU for SNMP or
Telnet access (Table C-9, General Management Configuration Options,
and Table C-10, Management Trap Configuration Options).

The configuration tables include a description of each configuration function and
its available selections. In the tables, the top line of each configuration option
entry indicates the factory default setting.

DTE Interface Configuration Options
NOTE:
These configuration options are only available for 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs.
Table C-1.

DTE Interface Configuration Options (1 of 2)

DTE Port: Enab
Next Enab Disab

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Port. Enables the use of the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port.
Enab – Allows the use of the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Disab – Prohibits the use of the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
NOTE: When this configuration option is disabled, you cannot display or configure any
other DTE Interface configuration options. If the clock source configuration option is
set to DTE, it is changed to NET.
DTE Framing: ESF (Factory 1)
Next D4 ESF Prev

D4 (Factory 2)

DTE Line Framing Format. Designates the framing format for the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
D4 – Configures for the D4 framing format.
ESF – Configures for the Extended Superframe framing format.
DTE Coding: B8ZS (Factory 1)
Next AMI B8ZS Prev

AMI (Factory 2)

DTE Line Coding Format. Designates the line coding format to be used on the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
AMI – Uses the Alternate Mark Inversion coding format.
B8ZS – Uses the Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression coding format.
Equal: 0—133
Next 0—133

133—266

266—399

399—533

533—655

DTE Line Equalization. Specifies the DTE line equalization compensation parameters that
permit a standard DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal to be delivered over a distance of up to
655 feet.

C-2

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-1.

DTE Interface Configuration Options (2 of 2)

Extrn DLB: Disab
Next Enab Disab

DTE Loopback on External Contact. Allows the control of a DTE Loopback (DLB) by an
external contact on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Enab – Allows the DSU/CSU to begin a DLB when the external contact is closed. The
DSU/CSU remains in DLB as long as the contact remains closed.
Disab – Prevents the state of the external contact from affecting the operation of DLB.
Send Ones: Enab
Next Enab Disab

Send All Ones on DTE Failure. Specifies the action to take on the signal transmitted to the
network when a valid signal cannot be recovered from the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface (due to an LOS, OOF, or AIS condition).
Enab – Sends all ones on the DS0 channels allocated to the network interface when an
LOS, AIS, or OOF condition occurs on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Disab – Passes the data unchanged to the network interface channels.

Port Configuration Options
Table C-2.

Port Configuration Options (1 of 5)

Port Type: E530 (Factory 1) V.35 (Factory 2)
Next E530 V.35 RS449 X.21 Prev
Data Port Type. Allows selection of the data port interface type.
E530 – Configures the port as an EIA-530-A compatible interface. EIA-530-A DTEs can
be directly connected to a port connector on the back of the DSU/CSU.
V.35 – Configures the port as a V.35 compatible interface. V.35 DTEs can be connected to
a port connector using an EIA-530-A-to-V.35 adapter.
RS449 – Configures the port as an RS-449 compatible interface. RS-449 DTEs can be
connected to a port connector using an EIA-530-A-to-RS-449 adapter.
X.21 – Configures the port as an X.21 compatible interface. X.21 DTEs can be connected
to a port connector using an EIA-530-A-to-X.21 adapter.
NOTE: If this configuration option is set to X.21, set the All Ones configuration option to
RTS or Disab.
Base Rate: Nx64
Next Nx64 Nx56

Data Port Base Rate. Allows selection of the base rate for the data port. The data rate for
the port is a multiple (from 1 to 24) of the base rate specified with this configuration option.
Nx64 – Sets the base rate for this port to 64 kbps. The data rate is Nx64 kbps, where N is
a number from 1 to 24.
Nx56 – Sets the base rate for this port to 56 kbps. The data rate is Nx56 kbps, where N is
a number from 1 to 24.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-3

C. Configuration Options

Table C-2.

Port Configuration Options (2 of 5)

Net DCLB: Disab (Factory 1) Both (Factory 2)
Next Disab V.54 FT1 Both Prev
Network Initiated DCLB. Allows the initiation and termination of a Data Channel Loopback
(V.54 loop 2) by the receipt of a V.54 DCLB-actuate sequence or DCLB-release sequence
from the network or far-end device. The sequences may be either V.54 or FT1 (ANSI)
compliant sequences.
Disab – Ignores the DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences for this port.
V.54 – Enables DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with the V.54
standard for “Inter-DCE signaling for point to point circuits.”
FT1 – Enables DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with the ANSI
T1.403, Annex B standard for “In-band signaling for fractional-T1 (FT1) channel
loopbacks.”
Both – Enables DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with either the
ANSI or V.54 standard. The type of actuate and release sequences do not have to match.
Port LB: Disab (Factory 1) Both (Factory 2)
Next Disab DTLB DCLB Both Prev
Port (DTE) Initiated Loopbacks. Allows the initiation and termination of a local Data
Terminal Loopback (DTLB) or remote Data Channel Loopback (DCLB) by the DTE
connected to this port. (DTLB is equivalent to a V.54 loop 3, and DCLB is equivalent to a
V.54 loop 2.) Control of these loopbacks is through the DTE interchange circuits as
specified by the V.54 standard.
Disab – Disables control of local DTLBs and remote DCLBs by the DTE connected to this
port.
DTLB – Gives control of the local DTLBs for this port to the DTE attached to this port. This
loopback is controlled by the Local Loopback interchange circuit LL (CCITT 141).
DCLB – Gives control of the remote DCLBs for the far-end port connected to this port to
the DTE attached to this port. This loopback is controlled by the Remote Loopback
interchange circuit RL (CCITT 140). The far-end equipment must support in-band V.54
loopbacks.
Both – Gives control of local DTLBs and remote DCLBs to the DTE connected to this
port.
All Ones: Both
Next Disab DTR

RTS

Both

Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready. Specifies the conditions on the data port that
determine when valid data is not being sent from the DTE. When this condition is
detected, all ones are sent to the network on the DS0 channels allocated to the port.
Disab – Disables the monitoring of interchange circuits from the DTE connected to this
port.
DTR – Monitors the DTE Ready interchange circuit CD (CCITT 108/1/2). When DTR is
interrupted, all ones are sent to the network.
RTS – Monitors the Request-to-Send interchange circuit CA (CCITT 105). When RTS is
interrupted, all ones are sent to the network.
Both – Monitors both DTR and RTS. If either is interrupted, all ones are sent to the
network.
NOTE: If the Port Type configuration option is set to X.21, set this configuration option
to RTS or Disab.

C-4

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-2.

Port Configuration Options (3 of 5)

Rcv Yellow: Halt
Next None Halt

Action on Network Yellow Alarm. Specifies the action taken on this port when a Yellow
Alarm is received on the network interface.
None – Makes the data port unaffected by Yellow Alarms received on the network
interface.
Halt – Stops the transmission of data on the port and disables the data port when Yellow
Alarms are received on the network interface. When Yellow Alarms are received, all ones
are sent on the Received Data interchange circuit BB (CCITT 104). The Clear-to-Send
interchange circuit CB (CCITT 106) is interrupted.
Tx Clock: Int
Next Int Ext

Data Port Transmit Clock. Specifies whether the transmitted data for the port is clocked
using an internal clock provided by the DSU/CSU (synchronized to the clock source
specified by the clock source configuration option in the General configuration option
group) or an external clock provided by the DTE connected to the port. When an external
clock is used, it must be synchronized to the same clock source as the DSU/CSU.
Int – Indicates the clock is provided internally by the DSU/CSU on the TXC interchange
circuit DB (CCITT 114).
Ext – Indicates the clock is provided externally by the DTE on the XTXC interchange
circuit DA (CCITT 113). Use this selection when the clock source is set to this data port.
InvertTxC: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Invert Transmit Clock. Specifies whether the clock supplied by the DSU/CSU on the TXC
interchange circuit DB (CCITT 114) is phase inverted with respect to the Transmitted Data
interchange circuit BA (CCITT 103). This configuration option is useful when long cable
lengths between the DSU/CSU and the DTE are causing data errors.
Enab – Indicates TXC supplied by the DSU/CSU on this port is phase inverted.
Disab – Indicates TXC supplied by the DSU/CSU on this port is not phase inverted.
InvrtData: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Invert Transmitted and Received Data. Specifies whether the port’s transmitted data and
received data are logically inverted before being transmitted or received. This
configuration option is useful for applications where HDLC data is being transported.
Inverting the data ensures that the density requirements for the network interface are met.
Enab – Indicates the transmitted data and received data for this port are inverted.
Disab – Indicates the transmitted data and received data for this port are not inverted.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-5

C. Configuration Options

Table C-2.

Port Configuration Options (4 of 5)

EDL: Disab
Next Enab

Disab

Embedded Data Link. Specifies whether Embedded Data Link (EDL) is enabled for a
particular port. If EDL is enabled, then 8 kbps of the total bandwidth allocated for this port
is not available to the synchronous data port. For exampl“e, if the port rate is 256 kbps
(4 DS0 channels allocated) and EDL is enabled, then only 248 kbps is available to the
port. EDL provides the following: detection of frame synchronization, CRC of the data
stream (excluding the 8 kbps EDL), and an in-band data link (4 kbps) between the local
and remote units. The 4 kbps in-band data link can be used for performance report
messages and as an IP link for SNMP or Telnet sessions.
Enab – Indicates the port’s EDL is enabled.
Disab – Indicates the port’s EDL is disabled.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– If the local DSU/CSU’s EDL is enabled, then the remote DSU/CSU’s EDL must also
be enabled.
– EDL is not recommended for networks in which data is examined for routing
purposes (e.g., frame relay, x.25).
Err Rate: 10E-4
Next 10E-4 10E-5

10E-6

10E-7

10E-8

10E-9

Port Excessive Error Rate Threshold. Sets the error rate threshold that determines when
an Excessive Error Rate (EER) condition is declared for a particular port. The error rate
selected by this configuration option is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC5
errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time.
10E-4 – 10E-4 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
1,535 CRC5 errors are detected in a 10-second period. It is cleared with less than
1,536 errors in ten seconds.
10E-5 – 10E-5 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
921 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60-second period. It is cleared with less than
922 errors in sixty seconds.
10E-6 – 10E-6 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
92 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60-second period. It is cleared with less than 93 errors
in sixty seconds.
10E-7 – 10E-7 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
9 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60-second period. It is cleared with less than 10 errors in
sixty seconds.
10E-8 – 10E-8 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
41 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15-minute intervals. It is cleared with less than
42 errors in three 15-minute intervals.
10E-9 – 10E-9 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
4 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15-minute intervals. It is cleared with less than
5 errors in three 15-minute intervals.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled.

C-6

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-2.

Port Configuration Options (5 of 5)

Near-end: Disab
Next Disab Maint

Send

Both

Near-End Performance Statistics. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU maintains near-end
performance statistics and sends performance report messages (PRMs) for a particular
port.
Disab – Disables near-end performance statistics and does not send PRMs.
Maint – Maintains near-end performance statistics for this port.
Send – Sends PRMs over the port’s EDL every second. Each PRM contains the
performance statistics for the previous 4 seconds.
Both – Maintains near-end performance statistics and sends PRMs over the port’s EDL.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled.
– If the local DSU/CSU is configured to send near-end performance statistics, then
the remote device must be configured to maintain far-end performance statistics.
Far-end: Disab
Next Disab Maint

Far-End Performance Statistics. Specifies whether to monitor for far-end performance
report messages (PRMs) and maintain far-end performance registers for a particular port.
Disab – Disables far-end performance statistics.
Maint – Monitors the port’s EDL for PRMs and maintains far-end performance statistics.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled.
– If the local DSU/CSU is configured to maintain far-end performance statistics, then
the remote device must be configured to send near-end performance statistics.
Mgmt Link: Disab
Next Enab Disab

EDL Management Link. Specifies whether the EDL management link is enabled for a
particular port. Selecting Enab allows SNMP or Telnet traffic to flow over the 4 kbps
in-band data link provided by EDL.
Enab – Enables the port’s EDL management link.
Disab – Disables the port’s EDL management link.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled or the FDL is enabled.
– If the local DSU/CSU’s EDL is enabled, then the remote device’s EDL must also be
enabled.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-7

C. Configuration Options

Network Interface Configuration Options
Table C-3.

Network Interface Configuration Options (1 of 3)

NET Framing: ESF (Factory 1)
Next D4 ESF Prev

D4 (Factory 2)

Network Line Framing Format. The framing format to be used on the network interface.
D4 – Configures for the D4 framing format.
ESF – Configures for the Extended Superframe format.
NET Coding: B8ZS (Factory 1)
Next AMI B8ZS Prev

AMI (Factory 2)

Network Line Coding Format. The line coding format to be used on the network interface.
AMI – Configures for the Alternate Mark Inversion coding format.
B8ZS – Configures for the Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression coding format.
LBO: 0.0
Next 0.0

–7.5

–15

–22.5

Line Build Out. The line build out (LBO) for the signal transmitted to the network (0.0 dB is
the factory default).
ANSI PRM: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Generate ANSI Performance Report Messages. Specifies whether ANSI T1.403
compliant performance report messages (PRMs) are generated.
Enab – Generates and sends ANSI PRMs over the FDL every second.
Disab – Prevents the DSU/CSU from generating ANSI PRMs.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if the framing format is set to ESF.
Mgmt Link: Disab
Next Enab Disab

FDL Management Link. Specifies whether Facility Data Link (FDL) is enabled. Selecting
Enab allows SNMP or Telnet traffic to flow over the 4 kbps data link provided by FDL.
Running SNMP or Telnet over FDL requires an end-to-end FDL connection and cannot be
terminated within the network.
Enab – Enables the FDL management link for SNMP or Telnet.
Disab – Disables the FDL management link.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available if the framing format is set to ESF.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is enabled.
– If the local DSU/CSU’s FDL is enabled, the remote DSU/CSU’s FDL must also be
enabled.

C-8

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-3.

Network Interface Configuration Options (2 of 3)

NET LLB: Enab
Next Enab Disab

Network Initiated Line Loopback (LLB). Allows initiation and termination of the LLB to be
controlled by the receipt of LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands from the network
(or remote DSU/CSU).
Enab – Causes the DSU/CSU to enter an LLB (if the DSU/CSU can perform an LLB in its
current state) and to cause an LLB-Release command to terminate the LLB.
Disab – Causes the DSU/CSU to ignore LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands (the
DSU/CSU is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR 62411).
NOTE: When this configuration option is enabled, the DSU/CSU recognizes the
in-band LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release codes specified by AT&T as well as the
bit-oriented FDL messages specified by ANSI (for ESF only).
NET PLB: Enab
Next Enab Disab

Network Initiated Payload Loopback (PLB). Allows initiation and termination of the PLB to
be controlled by the receipt of PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands from the
network (or remote DSU/CSU).
Enab – Causes the DSU/CSU to enter a PLB (if the DSU/CSU can perform a PLB in its
current state) and to cause a PLB-Release command to terminate the PLB.
Disab – Causes the DSU/CSU to ignore PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands (the
DSU/CSU is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR 54016).
NOTES:
– When this configuration option is enabled, the DSU/CSU recognizes the in-band
PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release codes specified by AT&T as well as the bit-oriented
FDL messages specified by ANSI.
– This configuration option is only available when the network interface framing is set
to ESF.
Bit Stuff: 62411
Next 62411 Part68

Disab

Bit Stuffing. Determines when bit stuffing is performed to meet the ones density
requirements for data transmission on the network. You must choose the maximum
number of consecutive zeros the DSU/CSU can receive before it inserts a one.
62411 – Specifies that a one be inserted in the data stream after 15 consecutive zeros or
when the density of ones falls below 12.5% (complies with AT&T TR 62411).
Part68 – Specifies that a one be inserted in the data stream after 80 consecutive zeros
(complies with FCC Part 68).
Disab – Disables bit stuffing so that ones density is not enforced.
NOTES:
– To comply with Canadian DOC CS-03 regulations, equipment installed in Canada
must be configured to select 62411.
– To comply with USA Part 68 regulations, equipment installed in the USA must be
configured to select Part 68.
– This configuration option is only available if the network interface line coding format
is set to AMI.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-9

C. Configuration Options

Table C-3.

Network Interface Configuration Options (3 of 3)

Circuit Ident:
Next Edit Clear

Network Circuit Identifier. Specifies the transmission vendor’s circuit identifier for the
purpose of facilitating troubleshooting. The network circuit identifier is an ASCII text string
that may be up to 255 characters in length.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the network circuit identifier using the generic text
string entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the network circuit identifier. The network circuit identifier is set
to a null string.

Channel Configuration Options
The Channel configuration options are divided into two tables as follows:

DTE Channel Configuration Options (Table C-4)
Data Port Channel Configuration Options (Table C-5)

NOTE:
Table C-4, DTE Channel Configuration Options, and Table C-5, Data Port
Channel Configuration Options, describe the DTE channel and data port
channel configuration options. The configuration options in Table C-4, DTE
Channel Configuration Options, only appear if the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
port is enabled and you are using a 2-port or 4-port DSU/CSU.

C-10

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-4.

DTE Channel Configuration Options

DTE Channels:
Assign Voice
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Channel. Assigns DS0 channels from the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface to DS0 channels on the network interface, and specifies which DS0
channels carry voice signaling information.
Assign – Assigns DS0 channels from the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the
network interface.
Voice – Specifies which DS0 channels from the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface are
voice channels and should pass Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS) information to the network
interface.
N1
–

N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 ... N24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– ... -

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Channel Allocation. Assigns DS0 channels from the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the network interface.
Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface. Line 2 displays what is allocated
to the DS0 channel indicated in Line 1. Possible values for Line 2 are:
Value

Meaning

–

This DS0 channel is not allocated. You can modify this value on
this screen.

Prtn

This DS0 channel is allocated to port n, where n is a number from
1 to 4. You cannot modify this value on this screen.

This DS0 channel is allocated to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface DS0 channel n, where n is a number from 1 to 24. You
can modify this value on this screen.

Assign DTE channels to network channels by pressing the Function key below the
network channel desired. The DTE channel number scrolls up one number each time you
press the Function key. Only unassigned DTE channels appear during scrolling.
D1
D2
D3 D4 D5
D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12 D13 ... D24
RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS ... RBS
Specify DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Voice Channels. Specifies which DS0 channels from the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface are voice channels and should pass Robbed Bit
Signaling information to the network interface.
Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. Line 2 displays
whether the DS0 channel indicated in Line 1 is a voice or data channel. Possible values
for Line 2 are:
Value

Meaning

RBS

This DS0 channel is a voice channel carrying RBS information.
When this DS0 channel is assigned to a network DS0 channel,
RBS information is preserved across the connection.

Data

This DS0 channel is a data channel that does not contain RBS
information. Signaling is not preserved across the connection.

Press the Function key below the desired channel to toggle between RBS and Data.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-11

C. Configuration Options

Table C-5.

Data Port Channel Configuration Options (1 of 4)

Channel Config:
Dsply Clear DTE

Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
_______________________

NOTE: The configuration options described in this table are made available by
selecting Prt1, Prt2, Prt3, or Prt4 from the Channel Config screen. Table C-4, DTE
Channel Configuration Options, describes the DTE configuration options. For
information about the operation of Display and Clear, refer to Configuring DS0
Channels in Chapter 3, Operation.
Data Port Channel. Allows the assignment of a particular port to DS0 channels on either
the network interface, the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or another port (see the
Assign To configuration option below).
NOTE: For 2-port DSU/CSUs, only Ports 1 and 2 are available; for 1-port DSU/CSUs,
only Port 1 is available, and only the Port Rate configuration option appears if you
select this port.
Assign To: NET
Next NET DTE

Prtn

Data Port Channel Allocation Destination. Allows you to assign this port to DS0 channels
on either the network interface, the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or another port.
NET – Assigns this port to DS0 channels on the network interface.
DTE – Assigns this port to DS0 channels on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. If the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is disabled, this selection does not appear.
Prtn – Assigns this port to another port, where n is the port number of all available ports
except the port selected from the Channel Config screen. For example, if you select Prt1
from the Channel Config screen, Prt2, Prt3, and Prt4 appear for 4-port DSU/CSUs. Use
this feature to designate a port as a backup port. You can attach an external backup
device to Prtn and manually assign the selected port to the backup port (i.e., route data
from the selected port to the backup port). When a port is assigned to another port, DSR
is turned on. Selecting Prtn and Next takes you directly to the Port Rate configuration
option, bypassing the Assign By configuration option. EDL (for 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs) does not operate when a synchronous data port is assigned to another
synchronous data port. Therefore, if EDL is enabled, it is ignored.
NOTE: Changing this configuration option from one T1 interface to the other (NET or
DTE) deallocates all DS0 channels assigned to the previous interface.
Assign By: Block
Next Block ACAMI

Chan

Data Port Channel Allocation Method. If NET or DTE is selected using the Assign To
configuration option, this configuration option designates the method for assigning DS0
channels to the destination T1 interface.
Block – Allocates DS0 channels to this port by the block method.
ACAMI – Allocates DS0 channels to this port by the Alternate Channel Alternate Mark
Inversion method. The difference between block and ACAMI is that the number of
channels allocated with ACAMI is double the number needed for the port rate. With
ACAMI, every alternate DS0 channel does not carry data from the port but always
transmits and receives all ones.
Chan – Allocates DS0 channels to this port by the individual channel method.
NOTE: Changing this configuration option from one method to another (Block, ACAMI,
or Chan) deallocates all DS0 channels assigned to either the network interface or the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.

C-12

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-5.

Data Port Channel Configuration Options (2 of 4)

Port Rate: 384
Next 64 128 192 256 320 384
832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216

448
1280

512 576 640 704 768
1344 1408 1472 1536 Prev

392
1120

448 504 560 616 672
1176 1232 1288 1344 Prev

OR
Next 56
728 784

112 168 224 280 336
840 896 952 1008 1064

Data Port Rate (appears when using the block or ACAMI channel allocation method, or
when a synchronous data port is assigned to another synchronous data port). Designates
the data rate for the port. Available selections depend on the current base rate configured
for the port. The factory default for Nx64 is 384 kbps, and Nx56 is 336 kbps.
NOTES:
– This configuration option does not appear if the individual channel allocation
method (Chan) is selected using the Assign By configuration option.
– Changing this configuration option from one rate to another deallocates all DS0
channels assigned to either the network interface or the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface.
– When you enable EDL (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs), 8 kbps of the total
bandwidth allocated for this port is not available to the synchronous data port. For
example, if you select 256 kbps and EDL is enabled, only 248 kbps are available.
– When you enable EDL (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) on a synchronous data
port and the clock source is set to that synchronous data port, the external device
must provide a clock of 8 kbps less than the expected data port rate. For example, if
you select 64 kbps, the external clock source must supply a 56 kbps clock signal.
– For the 3164 DSU/CSU there is a hardware limitation that limits the combined
bandwidth used by Port 1 and Port 3 to a total of 2048 kbps and the combined
bandwidth used by Port 2 and Port 4 to 2048 kbps. Thus, when entering this menu,
the rate choices are limited due to this constraint. This limitation only occurs in
configurations mapping a port to a port or when mapping ports to the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface and to the network.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-13

C. Configuration Options

Table C-5.

Data Port Channel Configuration Options (3 of 4)

Start At:
Next Clear
N24 Prev

N10

N11

...

D10

D11

...

OR
Start At:
Next Clear
D24 Prev

Data Port Channel Allocation (appears for the block and ACAMI methods only).
Designates the starting DS0 channel, N1–N24 for the network interface and D1–D24 for
the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Available selections are only those DS0 channels that provide enough bandwidth (based
on the configured data rate) to be used as a starting channel number.
Select the desired starting channel number by pressing the Function key under that
number. When you make the selection, the DSU/CSU allocates the correct amount of
DS0 channels to support the data rate currently configured for the port.
Clear – Deallocates all DS0 channels for this port from the network interface or the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the individual channel allocation
method (Chan) is selected using the Assign By configuration option, or if Prtn is
selected using the Assign To configuration option.

C-14

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-5.
Next

Data Port Channel Configuration Options (4 of 4)

N1
–

N2
–

N3
–

N4
–

N5
–

N6
–

N7
–

N8
–

N9
–

N10
–

N11
–

N12 ... N24
–
... Prev

D1
–

D2
–

D3
–

D4
–

D5
–

D6
–

D7
–

D8
–

D9
–

D10
–

D11
–

D12 ... D24
-...
Prev

Data Port Channel Allocation (appears for the individual channel method only).
Designates the DS0 channel to allocate to this port, N1–N24 for the network interface and
D1-D24 for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface or the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface. Line 2 displays what is allocated to the DS0 channel indicated in Line 1.
Possible values for Line 2 are:
Value

Meaning

–

This DS0 channel is not allocated. You can modify this value on this
screen.

Prtn

This DS0 channel is allocated to port n, where n is a number from
1 to 4. You cannot modify this value on this screen for this port only.

This DS0 channel is allocated to the network interface DS0
channel n, where n is a number from 1 to 24. You cannot modify this
value on this screen.

This DS0 channel is allocated to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface DS0 channel n, where n is a number from 1 to 24. You can
modify this value on this screen.

Select the channel by pressing the Function key under that number. To deallocate a port,
press the Function key under that port number. Pressing the Function key under channels
assigned to other ports has no effect.
NOTES:
– The DSU/CSU automatically derives the data rate for the port from the number of
DS0 channels allocated.
– For the 3164 DSU/CSU there is a hardware limitation that limits the combined
bandwidth used by Port 1 and Port 3 to a total of 2048 kbps and the combined
bandwidth used by Port 2 and Port 4 to 2048 kbps. If a selection of Prtn causes this
limit to be exceeded, the selection is ignored and the “-” continues to be displayed
for the channel.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-15

C. Configuration Options

General Configuration Options
Table C-6.

General Configuration Options (1 of 2)

Gen Yellow: Enab
Next Enab Disab

Generate Yellow Alarm Signals. Determines whether the DSU/CSU generates Yellow
Alarm signals on the network and DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available for 1-port DSU/CSUs or if the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface is disabled. If the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is
disabled, the DSU/CSU always generates the Yellow Alarm signal on the network
interface.
Enab – Generates the Yellow Alarm signal for both the network and DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interfaces.
Disab – Disables the Yellow Alarm signal. When this configuration option is disabled,
Yellow Alarm conditions on the network interface cause an AIS signal to be transmitted on
the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
NOTE: When this configuration option is disabled, the DTE equipment connected to
the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is responsible for generation of the Yellow Alarm
signal on the network interface. In this case, the interface port marked DTE must only
be connected to an FCC Part 68 Registered (for USA) and Canadian DOC Certified
(for Canada) Digital Service Unit or System, such as PBX, with a DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface. Failure to do so is a violation of FCC Rules or DOC Regulations.
Clock Src: NET
Next NET DTE

Prt1

Int

Ext

DSU/CSU Clock Source. Specifies the master clock source for the DSU/CSU. This
selection synchronizes all internal timing and external interface clocks. The clock rate(s)
for the external timing interfaces are independent of the input rate for the master clock.
Failure of the clock specified by the Clock Source selection results in automatic fallback to
internal clock.
NET – Configures the network interface as the master clock source.
DTE – Configures the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface as the master clock source. This
selection is not available for 1-port DSU/CSUs or if the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface
is disabled. If the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is disabled after making this
selection, the master clock source is changed to NET.
Prt1 – Configures data port 1 as the master clock source. This is the only synchronous
data port you can use for the master clock. If you enable EDL if for Port 1 and the
DSU/CSU Clock Source is set to Prt1, the external device must provide clocking of
8 kbps less than the expected data port rate. For example, if you select 64 kbps, the
external clock must supply a 56 kbps clock signal.
Int – Configures the internal clock as the master clock source.
Ext – Configures an external clock (provided through the Clock In connector) as the
master clock source. This selection is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.

C-16

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-6.

General Configuration Options (2 of 2)

Clock Rate: 1544
Next 2048 1544

External Clock Rate. Specifies the clock rate when the master clock source is configured
for external clock (Ext). This configuration option does not appear when the clock source
is not an external clock.
2048 – Sets the input rate of the external clock to 2,048 kHz.
1544 – Sets the input rate of the external clock to 1,544 kHz.
8 – Sets the input rate of the external clock to 8 kHz.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– External clock rate 2,048 kHz does not imply E1 compatibility.
Tst Timeout: Enab
Next Enab Disab

Test Timeout. Specifies whether user-initiated loopback and pattern tests have durations
that are specified by the Tst Duration configuration option.
Enab – Loopback and pattern tests initiated on the DSU/CSU have specified durations.
Disab – Disables test timeout. The tests are terminated manually.
NOTE: For DSU/CSUs that are remotely managed through an inband data stream
such as EDL or FDL, the recommended setting is Enab. If tests are inadvertently left in
the active state, the Enab setting will allow the test to timeout (terminate) after a
specified time.
Tst Duration: 10
Next Up Down

Save

Test Duration. Specifies the duration (1 to 120 minutes) of user-initiated loopback and
pattern tests. (The Tst Timeout configuration option must be set to Enab.) Use the left or
right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to change. Use the Function
keys (Up or Down) to increment or decrement the digit.
Up – Increments the test duration.
Down – Decrements the test duration.
Save – Stores the test duration.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-17

C. Configuration Options

User Interface Configuration Options
NOTE:
A circular symbol (●) identifies configuration options that are available on
standalone DSU/CSUs only. A triangular symbol (▲) identifies configuration
options that are available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only.
Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (1 of 10)

Self-Test: Enab
Next Enab Disab

Initial Self-Test. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU performs a device self-test at power-up
and after a device reset.
Enab – Enables a self-test.
Disab – Disables the self-test.
FP Access: Enab
Next Enab Disab

Front Panel Access. Determines whether front panel access or display is allowed at the
DSU/CSU.
Enab – Allows the front panel to access and display data.
Disab – Prevents the access and display of data.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
FP Pass: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Front Panel Pass-Through. Allows dial-out access to a remote DSU/CSU using the front
panel pass-through operation.
Enab – Allows dial-out access to a remote DSU/CSU.
Disab – Prevents dial-out access to a remote DSU/CSU.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
Dial-In: Enab
Next Enab

Disab

Dial-in Access. Allows dial-in access to the DSU/CSU. For standalone DSU/CSUs, dial-in
access is through the modem port. For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, dial-in access is
through an external device that is connected to the communication port.
Enab – Allows dial-in access to the DSU/CSU.
Disab – Prevents dial-in access. Incoming calls to the DSU/CSU are not answered.
NOTE: To enable Dial-In for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, the external device must be
configured for automatic answer and the ComExtDev configuration option must be
enabled.

C-18

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (2 of 10)

Password: None
Next None Com

Modem

Both

Password Mode. Activates a password prompt that prevents access until a password is
entered.
None – Does not require a password.
Com – Prompts the communications port user to enter a password.
Modem – Prompts the remote modem port user to enter a password. This selection is
available on standalone DSU/CSUs only.
Both – Prompts both the communications port user and the remote modem port user to
enter a password. This selection is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only.
Com Port: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Setting the Carrier Communication Port. Enables the use of the communication port in
carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Enab – This communication port is enabled.
Disab – The communication port is disabled.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ▲
Com Use: ASCII
Next Mgmt ASCII

Daisy

Term

Communication Port Use. Specifies how the communication port is used.
Mgmt – Configures the communication port as the link to an SNMP or Telnet system.
ASCII – Configures the communication port as a proprietary ASCII port supporting Front
Panel Emulation software and ASCII alarm messages. Only one ASCII communication
port is allowed per 3000 Series carrier.
Daisy – Configures the communication port as an SNMP or Telnet port that is daisy
chained to the auxiliary port of an another 31xx Series device. This selection is available
on standalone DSU/CSUs only.
Term – Configures the communication port as the interface to an async terminal.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-19

C. Configuration Options

Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (3 of 10)

ComExtDev: Disab
Next Disab AT

Other

Carrier Communication Port’s External Device Commands. Specifies the communication
port’s external device commands. When this configuration option is disabled, no
commands are sent out the communication port. Select AT to have standard attention (AT)
commands sent out the communication port to control the external device. Select Other to
configure the connect prefix, the connect indication string, the escape sequence, the
escape sequence delay, and the disconnect string.
Disab – Allows no commands to be sent out the communication port.
AT – Allows standard AT commands to be sent out the communication port.
Other – Allows user configurable commands to be sent out the communication port.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ▲
– This configuration option is not available if the communications port is disabled.
– Carrier Detect (CD) is used to detect that the external device’s connection is lost.
Therefore, do not allow the CD lead to be forced on by the external device.
– The external device should be strapped to ignore Data Terminal Ready (DTR).
ComConnPrefix:
Next Edit Clear

Carrier Communication Port Connect Prefix. Specifies the connect prefix to the dial
directory phone number. When you make a connection or the DSU/CSU automatically
makes a connection (dial-out alarms or traps) through the communication port, the
connect prefix and the dial directory phone number are used to establish the connection.
The connect prefix is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length. If the
connect prefix is NULL, then no connect prefix is used.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the connect prefix using the generic text string
entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the connect prefix. The connect prefix is set to a null string.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ▲
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.
– If ComExtDev is configured for Other and the external device requires characters
after the dial phone number, you must append the characters to the phone number.

C-20

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (4 of 10)

ComConnected:
Next Edit Clear

Carrier Communication Port Connect Indication String. Specifies the communication
port’s connect indication string. When you make a connection or the DSU/CSU
automatically makes a connection (dial-out alarms or traps) through the communication
port, this string determines that the connection has been established. The connect
indication string is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length. If the
connect indication string is not received within 1 minute, it will time-out the connection. If
the connect indication string is NULL, the communication port’s receive data stream is not
searched and a transition in the Carrier Detect (CD) lead is used to determine that a
connection has been established.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the case-sensitive connect indication string using
the generic text string entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the connect indication string. The connect indication string is
set to a null string.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ▲
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.
ComEscapeSeq:
Next Edit Clear

Carrier Communication Port Escape Sequence. Specifies the communication port’s
escape sequence. Once the external device connection has been established, either you
or the DSU/CSU can command the external device to disconnect. Before doing so, you
may need to send the escape sequence out to switch the external device into command
mode. The escape sequence is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in
length. If the escape sequence is NULL, no escape sequence is sent out.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the escape sequence using the generic text string
entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the escape sequence. The escape sequence is set to a null
string.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ▲
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-21

C. Configuration Options

Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (5 of 10)

ComEscDel: None
Next None 0.2s

0.4s

0.6s

0.8s

1.0s

Carrier Communication Port Escape Sequence Delay. Specifies the delay used while
sending the communication port escape sequence. Use the communication port escape
delay to specify the delay before sending the first character of the escape sequence and
the delay after the last character of the escape sequence. During the delay, no data is sent
out the communication port.
None – No communication port escape sequence delay.

X.Xs – The delay used during the communication port escape sequence (where X.X is
0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, or 1.0 seconds).
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ▲
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.
– ComEscDel must be configured for a delay greater than or equal to the escape
guard time required by the external device.
ComDisconnect:
Next Edit Clear

Carrier Communication Port Disconnect String. Specifies the communication port’s
disconnect string. The communication port’s disconnect string is sent to the external
device if either you or the DSU/CSU wants to command the external device to disconnect.
The external device must be in command mode before this command can be sent, so the
escape sequence will always be sent before the disconnect string. The disconnect string
is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length. If the disconnect string is
NULL, then no disconnect string is sent out.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the disconnect string using the generic text string
entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the disconnect string. The disconnect string is set to a null
string.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ▲
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.
Com Type: Async
Next Async Sync

Communication Port Type. Specifies whether the communication port uses synchronous
or asynchronous operation when it is configured as the SNMP management link.
Async – Configures the communication port for asynchronous operation.
Sync – Configures the communication port for synchronous operation.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
– This configuration option is not available if the Com Use configuration option is set
to ASCII, Daisy, or Term. In these cases, the communication port is always
asynchronous.

C-22

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (6 of 10)

Com Clk: Int
Next Int Ext

Communication Port Synchronous Clock. Specifies whether the communication port uses
internal or external clocking when it is configured for synchronous operation.
Int – Configures the communication port for internal clocking.
Ext – Configures the communication port for external clocking.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
– This configuration option is not available if the Com Type configuration option is set
to Async.
Com Rate: 9.6
Next 1.2 2.4

4.8

9.6

14.4

19.2

38.4

Communication Port Rate. Configures the bit rate for the communication port.
1.2 – Sets the bit rate to 1200 bps (for asynchronous operation only).
2.4 – Sets the bit rate to 2400 bps.
4.8 – Sets the bit rate to 4800 bps.
9.6 – Sets the bit rate to 9600 bps.
14.4 – Sets the bit rate to 14,400 bps.
19.2 – Sets the bit rate to 19,200 bps.
38.4 – Sets the bit rate to 38,400 bps. This rate is not supported for carrier-mounted
DSU/CSUs.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured
for synchronous operation and the clock source is external.
Char Length: 8
Next 7 8 Prev
Communication Port Character Length. Configures the character length (7 or 8 bits) for
the communication port.
NOTES:
– This configuration option must be set to 8 if the communication port is used as the
network communication link.
– This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured for
synchronous operation.
CParity: None
Next None Even

Odd

Communication Port Parity. Configures the parity (none, even, or odd) for the
communication port.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured
for synchronous operation.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-23

C. Configuration Options

Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (7 of 10)

CStop Bits: 1
Next 1 1.5

Communication Port Stop Bits. Configures the number of stop bits (1, 1.5, or 2) for the
communication port.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured
for synchronous operation.
Ignore DTR: No
Next Yes No

Communication Port Ignore DTR State. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU ignores the state
of the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) input to the communication port.
Yes – DTR is ignored.
No – DTR is not ignored.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured
for synchronous operation.
CmInActTm: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Communication Port Inactivity Timeout. Specifies whether the communication port
disconnects after a period of inactivity specified by the CmDiscTm configuration option.
Enab – The communication port disconnects after the period of inactivity specified by the
CmDiscTm configuration option.
Disab – The communication port does not disconnect due to inactivity.
CmDiscTm: 5
Next Up Down

Save

Communication Port Disconnect Time. Specifies the period of time (1 to 60 minutes)
before the communication port disconnects due to inactivity. (The CmInActTm
configuration option must be set to Enab.) Use the left or right arrow key to position the
cursor on the digit you want to change. Use the Function keys (Up or Down) to increment
or decrement the digit.
Up – Increments the time delay.
Down – Decrements the time delay.
Save – Stores the time delay for use with inactivity disconnects.
Modem Use: ASCII
Next Mgmt ASCII

Term

Modem Port Use. Specifies how the modem port is used.
Mgmt – Configures the modem port as the link to an SNMP or Telnet system.
ASCII – Configures the modem port as a proprietary ASCII port. This selection supports
dial-out ASCII alarm messages and dial-in/dial-out front panel access.
Term – Configures the modem port as the interface to an async terminal.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●

C-24

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (8 of 10)

Modem Type: Async
Next Async Sync

Modem Type. Specifies whether the port uses synchronous or asynchronous
communication if the modem port is configured as the SNMP management link.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
– This confBiguration option is not available if the Modem Use configuration option is
set to ASCII. In this case, the modem port is always asynchronous.
Modem Rate: 2.4
Next 1.2 2.4

Modem Port Rate. Configures the bit rate for the modem port.
1.2 – Sets the bit rate at 1200 bps.
2.4 – Sets the bit rate at 2400 bps.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
MChar Len: 8
Next 7 8

Modem Character Length. Configures the character length (number of data bits) for the
modem port. This does not include the start bit (always 1) or the stop bits; 8 is the factory
default.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
– This option must be set to 8 to perform PC emulation or pass-through operations, or
SNMP management.
MParity: None
Next None Even

Odd

Modem Parity. Configures the parity for the modem port. None is the factory default.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
MStop Bits: 1
Next 1 2

Modem Port Stop Bits. Configures the number of stop bits for the modem port; 1 is the
factory default.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
LSpaceDsc: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Long Space Disconnect. Specifies how the modem disconnects a call. This makes call
disconnecting more robust and prevents invalid data at the remote modem if the call is
disconnected. To be effective, the remote modem must be configured to disconnect if it
detects continuous space.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
– This configuration option is not available if the modem port is configured as an
SNMP management link and the link is configured for synchronous operation.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-25

C. Configuration Options

Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (9 of 10)

MoInActTm: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Modem Port Inactivity Timeout. Specifies whether the modem port disconnects after a
period of inactivity specified by the MoDiscTm configuration option.
Enab – The modem port disconnects after the period of inactivity specified by the
MoDiscTm configuration option.
Disab – The modem port does not disconnect due to inactivity.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
MoDiscTm: 5
Next Up Down

Save

Modem Port Disconnect Time. Specifies the period of time (1 to 60 minutes) before the
modem port disconnects due to inactivity. (The MoInActTm configuration option must be
set to Enab.) Use the left or right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to
change. Use the Function keys (Up or Down) to increment or decrement the digit.
Up – Increments the time delay.
Down – Decrements the time delay.
Save – Stores the time delay for use with inactivity disconnects.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
Aux Use: None
Next None Mgmt

Daisy

Auxiliary Port Use. Specifies how the auxiliary port is used. The auxiliary port only
supports Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) with the following parameters: type is
asynchronous, character length is 8, parity is none, and stop bit is 1.
None – Specifies that the auxiliary port is not to be used.
Mgmt – Configures the auxiliary port as the link to an SNMP manager or Telnet client via
an external LAN Adapter.
Daisy – Configures the auxiliary port as an SNMP or Telnet port that is daisy chained to
the communication port of an another 31xx Series device.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
Aux Rate: 19.2
Next 9.6 14.4

19.2

38.4

Auxiliary Port Rate. Configures the bit rate for the auxiliary port.
9.6 – Configures the auxiliary port rate as 9600 bps.
14.4 – Configures the auxiliary port rate as 14,400 bps.
19.2 – Configures the auxiliary port rate as 19,200 bps.
38.4 – Configures the auxiliary port rate as 38,400 bps.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●

C-26

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-7.

User Interface Configuration Options (10 of 10)

TnSession: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Telnet Session Enable. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU responds to Telnet session
requests.
Enab – The DSU/CSU responds to Telnet session requests.
Disab – The DSU/CSU does not respond to Telnet session requests.
TnPaswd: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Telnet Password Mode. Specifies whether a password is required for Telnet access.
Enab – A password is required for Telnet access.
Disab – A password is not required for Telnet access.
TnInActTm: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Telnet Inactivity Timeout. Specifies whether the Telnet session disconnects after a period
of inactivity specified by the TnDiscTm configuration option.
Enab – The Telnet session disconnects after the period of inactivity specified by the
TnDiscTm configuration option.
Disab – The Telnet session does not disconnect due to inactivity.
TnDiscTm: 5
Next Up Down

Save

Telnet Disconnect Time. Specifies the period of time (1 to 60 minutes) before the Telnet
session disconnects due to inactivity. (The TnInActTm configuration option must be set to
Enab.) Use the left or right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to
change. Use the Function keys (Up or Down) to increment or decrement the digit.
Up – Increments the time delay.
Down – Decrements the time delay.
Save – Stores the time delay for use with inactivity disconnects.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-27

C. Configuration Options

Alarm Configuration Options
NOTE:
A triangular symbol (▲) identifies a configuration option that is available on
carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only.
Table C-8.

Alarm Configuration Options (1 of 4)

Alrm Msg: Disab
Next Disab Modem

Com

Both

Alarm Messages. Controls the generation of alarm messages, which are routed to an
ASCII terminal or printer attached to the communication port and/or the modem port.
Disab – Prevents an alarm message for any alarm conditions.
Modem – Enables alarm messages routed to the modem port. This selection does not
appear on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Com – Enables alarm messages routed to the communication port.
Both – Enables alarm messages routed to both the modem and communication ports.
This selection does not appear on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
NOTE: Alarm messages are only sent to the communication port if the Com Use
configuration option is set to ASCII, otherwise the alarm messages are discarded.
SNMP Trap: Disab
Next Enab Disab

SNMP Trap Enable. Specifies whether SNMP trap messages are sent over the SNMP
management link.
Enab – Enables sending SNMP trap messages from this unit over any SNMP
management link.
Disab – Disables sending SNMP trap messages from this unit over any SNMP
management link.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs that have the communication port enabled, the
only traps that are disabled are those that pertain to this particular unit. Traps from
other units are passed through.
Trap Disc: Enab
Next Enab Disab

SNMP Trap Disconnect. Specifies whether the modem connection or carrier external
communication port device connection is disconnected after sending a trap message.
This configuration option applies only to modem connections or carrier external
communication port device connections initiated as a result of the trap message being
sent.
Enab – Specifies that the modem call or carrier external communication port device call is
disconnected after a trap message is sent.
Disab – Specifies that the modem call or carrier external communication port device call
is not disconnected after a trap message is sent. The line is held until it is manually
disconnected or disconnected by the remote modem.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if SNMP traps are enabled and the
integral modem or the carrier external communication port device is enabled and
configured as an SNMP management link.

C-28

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-8.

Alarm Configuration Options (2 of 4)

DialOut: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Alarm and Trap Dial Out. Controls whether generated alarm or trap messages initiate a
call if the integral modem connection or carrier external communication port device
connection has not already been established. When enabled, a call is placed to the phone
number contained in the alarm directory (directory A). If the call cannot be completed and
the retry option is enabled, the alarm or trap message is held until the call is completed or
has been retried unsuccessfully once. If more than one alarm message is received while
waiting for a call retry, only the highest priority alarm message received is held; all
previous messages are discarded. When the modem port is configured as the SNMP
management link, up to 10 SNMP trap messages can be queued at the interface.
Enab – Enables automatic call initiation (dial out) if an alarm or trap message needs to be
sent.
Disab – Disables automatic call initiation. Trap messages sent to the modem port or
carrier external communication port device are queued (held) if an integral modem
connection or carrier external communication port device connection has not been
previously established. Alarm messages are not queued.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, this configuration option is only available if the
communication port is enabled for an external device.
Call Retry: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Call Retry on Alarm or Trap. Determines whether a call that cannot be completed (busy,
no answer, etc.) is retried. This affects calls that are initiated in attempting to send an
alarm or trap message to the modem port or carrier external communication port device. If
call retry is specified, the DSU/CSU attempts to complete the call after a configurable
delay.
Enab – Enables call retry. If enabled, the call is retried once per alarm or trap message. A
delay as specified by the dial-out delay time is imposed between call attempts. If an
alternate dial-out directory is specified, both the alarm directory as well as the alternate
directory are retried once.
Disab – Disables call retry. If a call setup cannot be completed it is not retried.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, this configuration option is only available if the
communication port is enabled for an external device.
Dial Delay: 5
Next 1 2

Dial Out Delay Time on Alarm or Trap. Specifies the number of minutes to wait between
successive dial-out alarms or traps and before a retry attempt after failed alarm dial-outs.
The factory default is 5 minutes.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, this configuration option is only available if the
communication port is enabled for an external device.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-29

C. Configuration Options

Table C-8.

Alarm Configuration Options (3 of 4)

AltDialDir: None
Next None 1

Alternate Dial-Out Directory for Alarm or Trap. Specifies whether a call that cannot be
completed (busy, no answer, etc.) is retried using an alternate phone number. This affects
calls that are initiated in an attempt to send an alarm or trap message to the modem port
or carrier external communication port device. The alternate phone number to try is
contained in one of the five call directories. If call retry is enabled, the initial call is retried
at the original number once before a call attempt to the alternate number is tried. If the call
to the alternate number is unsuccessful, it is also retried once. The alternate dial-out
option applies to each alarm/trap event. Once a call for an alarm/trap message either
completes or fails all retry attempts, the next alarm/trap attempts to establish a call to the
phone number contained in the alarm directory.
None – Specifies that alternate alarm dial-out is not performed if a call cannot be
completed to the telephone number contained in the alarm directory.
1–5 – Specifies the call directory that contains the phone number to call if a call cannot be
completed to the telephone number contained in the alarm directory.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, this configuration option is only available if the
communication port is enabled for an external device.
Err Rate: 10E-4
Next 10E-4 10E-5

10E-6

10E-7

10E-8

10E-9

Excessive Error Rate Threshold. Sets the error rate threshold that determines if an
Excessive Error Rate (EER) condition is declared. This rate is determined by the ratio of
the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time.
Select from the following:
10E-4 – EER is declared if more than 1,535 CRC6 errors are detected within
10 seconds (factory default).
10E-5 – EER is declared if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected within 60 seconds.
10E-6 – EER is declared if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected within 60 seconds.
10E-7 – EER is declared if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected within 60 seconds.
10E-8 – EER is declared if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15-minute
intervals.
10E-9 – EER is declared if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15-minute
intervals.

C-30

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-8.

Alarm Configuration Options (4 of 4)

AlrmRelay: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Alarm Relay. Specifies whether an alarm condition for this circuit card activates the shared
alarm relay on the 3000 Series Carrier. The alarm deactivates if the condition(s) causing it
is corrected. An Alarm Cut-Off issued from the SDCP (or PC Emulation program) for a
particular carrier-mounted DSU/CSU also deactivates the alarm. The carrier-mounted
DSU/CSU does not reactivate the alarm relay until all alarm conditions for the unit are
cleared.
The following alarm conditions activate the alarm relay if this configuration option is
enabled:

Continuous Loss of Signal (LOS) or Out of Frame (OOF) at the network or DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Continuous Out of Frame (OOF) at any synchronous data port that has the Embedded
Data Link enabled.
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) received at either the network or DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
Yellow alarm signal received at either the network or DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface.
Excessive Error Rate (EER) detected at the network interface.
An Excessive Error Rate (EER) detected at any synchronous data port that has the
Embedded Data Link enabled.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ▲

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-31

C. Configuration Options

Management Configuration Options
The Management configuration options are divided into two tables as follows:

General Management Configuration Options (Table C-9)
Management Trap Configuration Options (Table C-10)

NOTE:
A circular symbol (●) identifies configuration options that are available on
standalone DSU/CSUs only. A triangular symbol (▲) identifies configuration
options that are available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only.
Table C-9.

General Management Configuration Options (1 of 7)

SNMP Mgt: Disab
Next Enab Disab

SNMP Management Enable. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU responds to SNMP session
requests.
Enab – The DSU/CSU responds to SNMP session requests.
Disab – The DSU/CSU does not respond to SNMP session requests.
NMS Valid: Disab
Next Enab Disab

NMS IP Validation. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU validates (for security reasons) the IP
address of an SNMP manager attempting to access the DSU/CSU. Allowable addresses
are specified using the NMS n IP Adr configuration option.
Enab – The DSU/CSU validates the IP address of SNMP management systems
attempting to access the DSU/CSU.
Disab – The DSU/CSU does not validate the IP address of SNMP management systems.
Num Sec Mgrs: 1
Next 1 2 3

Number of Security Managers. Specifies the number of SNMP managers that are allowed
to access the DSU/CSU.
NOTE: You must configure an IP address for each SNMP manager that is allowed access
to the DSU/CSU. Allowable addresses are specified using the NMS n IP Adr configuration
option.
NMS n IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear

NMS Manager n IP Address. Specifies the allowable IP address of an SNMP manager
attempting to access the DSU/CSU. The manager number (n) is specified by the Num Sec
Mgrs configuration option.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the allowable IP address for the SNMP manager.
Clear – Allows you to clear the allowable IP address for the SNMP manager. The IP
address is set to 000.000.000.000.

C-32

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-9.

General Management Configuration Options (2 of 7)

NMS n Access: Read
Next Read R/W Prev
NMS Manager n Access Type. Specifies the allowable type of access for an SNMP
manager attempting to access the DSU/CSU’s MIB using community name 1. The
manager number (n) is specified by the Num Sec Mgrs configuration option.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get) to the accessible objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 1 is used. This includes all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
R/W – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set) to the objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 1 is used. Write access is allowed for all objects specified
as read/write in the MIB RFCs. Read access is allowed for all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write.
System Name:
Next Edit Clear

System Name. Specifies the system name for this unit. This is the name of this
SNMP-managed node.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the system name.
Clear – Allows you to clear the system name.
System Location:
Next Edit Clear

System Location. Specifies the system location for this unit. This is the physical location of
this SNMP-managed node.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the system location.
Clear – Allows you to clear the system location.
System Contact:
Next Edit Clear

System Contact. Specifies the system contact person for this unit, and how to contact this
person.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the system contact.
Clear – Allows you to clear the system contact.
CommunityName1:
Next Edit Clear

Community Name 1. Specifies the first of two community names that are allowed to
access this unit’s Management Information Base (MIB). External SNMP managers must
supply this name to access an object in the MIB.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the first community name.
Clear – Allows you to clear the first community name.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-33

C. Configuration Options

Table C-9.

General Management Configuration Options (3 of 7)

Access 1: Read
Next Read R/W

Access 1. Specifies the type of access allowed for Community Name 1. This is the type of
access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using
Community Name 1.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get) to the accessible objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 1 is used. This includes all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
R/W – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set) to the objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 1 is used. Write access is allowed for all objects specified
as read/write in the MIB RFCs. Read access is allowed for all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write.
CommunityName2:
Next Edit Clear

Community Name 2. Specifies the second of two community names that are allowed to
access this unit’s Management Information Base (MIB). External SNMP managers must
supply this name to access an object in the MIB.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the second community name.
Clear – Allows you to clear the second community name.
Access 2: Read
Next Read R/W

Access 2. Specifies the type of access allowed for Community Name 2. This is the type of
access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using
Community Name 2.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get) to the accessible objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 2 is used. This includes all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
R/W – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set) to the objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 2 is used. Write access is allowed for all objects specified
as read/write in the MIB RFCs. Read access is allowed for all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write.
IP Adr:
Next Edit

Clear

IP Address for the DSU/CSU. Specifies the IP address needed to access the DSU/CSU.
Since this IP Address is not bound to a particular port, it can be used for remote access
via the FDL or EDL (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) management link.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the IP address for the DSU/CSU.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for the DSU/CSU. The IP address is set to
000.000.000.000.

C-34

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-9.

General Management Configuration Options (4 of 7)

NetMask:
Next Edit

Clear

Subnet Mask for the DSU/CSU. Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the
DSU/CSU. Since this subnet mask is not bound to a particular port, it can be used for
remote access via the FDL or EDL (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) management link.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the subnet mask for the DSU/CSU.
Clear – Allows you to clear the subnet mask for the DSU/CSU. The subnet mask is set to
000.000.000.000. If the subnet mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol creates a default
subnet mask based on the class of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
Com IP Adr:
Next Edit

Clear

Com Port IP Address. Specifies the IP address for the communication port if the Com Use
configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the IP address for the communication port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for the communication port. The IP address is
set to 000.000.000.000.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs if the
communication port is disabled.
Com NetMask:
Next Edit Clear

Subnet Mask for the Communication Port. Specifies the subnet mask for the
communication port if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the subnet mask for the communication port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the subnet mask for the communication port. The subnet mask
is set to 000.000.000.000. If the subnet mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol creates
a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
NOTE: This configuration option is not available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs if the
communication port is disabled.
Com Link: PPP
Next PPP SLIP

Com Port Link Layer Protocol. Specifies the link layer protocol for the communication port
if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
PPP – Specifies PPP as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the
communication port.
SLIP – Specifies SLIP as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the
communication port. The communication port must be configured for asynchronous
operation to support SLIP. This selection does not appear if the Com Use configuration
option is set to Daisy.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs if the
communication port is disabled.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-35

C. Configuration Options

Table C-9.

General Management Configuration Options (5 of 7)

Modem IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear

Modem Port IP Address. Specifies the IP address for the modem port if the Modem Use
configuration option is set to Mgmt.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the IP address for the modem port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for the modem port. The IP address is set to
000.000.000.000.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
Mdm NetMask:
Next Edit Clear

Subnet Mask for the Modem Port. Specifies the Subnet Mask for the modem port if the
Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the Subnet Mask for the modem port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the Subnet Mask for the modem port. The Subnet Mask is set
to 000.000.000.000. If the Subnet Mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol creates a
default Subnet Mask based on the class of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
Alt Mdm IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear

Alternate Modem Port IP Address. Specifies the alternate IP address for the modem port
if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt. This IP address is needed if a call
attempt does not complete on the primary alarm/trap phone number (contained in the
alarm directory) and the alternate dial out directory is used to try another phone number.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the alternate IP address for the modem port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the alternate IP address for the modem port. The IP address is
set to 000.000.000.000.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
Alt Mdm NetMask:
Next Edit Clear

Alternate Subnet Mask for the Modem Port. Specifies the alternate Subnet Mask for the
modem port if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt. This Subnet Mask is
needed if a call attempt does not complete on the primary alarm/trap phone number
(contained in the alarm directory) and the alternate dial-out directory is used to try another
phone number. If this configuration option contains a non-zero Subnet Mask, it is used as
the Subnet Mask for the modem port if a call is completed to the alternate phone number.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the alternate Subnet Mask for the modem port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the alternate Subnet Mask for the modem port. The Subnet
Mask is set to 000.000.000.000. If the Subnet Mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol
creates a default Subnet Mask based on the class of the IP address
(Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●

C-36

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-9.

General Management Configuration Options (6 of 7)

Modem Link: PPP
Next PPP SLIP

Modem Port Link Layer Protocol. Specifies the link layer protocol for the modem port if the
Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt.
PPP – Specifies PPP as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the modem
port.
SLIP – Specifies SLIP protocol as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the
modem port. The modem port must be configured for asynchronous operation to support
SLIP.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
Aux IP Adr:
Next Edit

Clear

IP Address for the Auxiliary Port. Specifies the IP address for the auxiliary port if the Aux
Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy. The auxiliary port only supports the PPP
link protocol.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the IP address for the auxiliary port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for the auxiliary port. The IP address is set to
000.000.000.000.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
Aux NetMask:
Next Edit Clear

Subnet Mask for the Auxiliary Port. Specifies the subnet mask for the auxiliary port if the
Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the subnet mask for the auxiliary port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the subnet mask for the auxiliary port. The subnet mask is set
to 000.000.000.000. If the subnet mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol creates a
default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ●
IPBusMast: Disab
Next Enab Disab

Setting the IP Bus Master. Specifies whether or not a particular carrier-mounted unit is the
IP Bus Master. There can only be one IP Bus Master per 3000 Series Carrier. Typically,
the carrier-mounted unit that has the SNMP/Telnet management system connected to it is
the IP Bus Master. This allows for faster access to the remaining carrier units. If an
SNMP/Telnet management system is connected to another carrier-mounted unit (i.e. not
the IP Bus Master) and the SNMP/Telnet management system tries to access another
carrier-mounted unit, the data has to be routed to the IP Bus Master first. Once the IP Bus
Master receives the data, it is routed to the appropriate slot.
Enab – This unit is the IP Bus Master. Only one IP Bus Master is allowed per 3000 Series
Carrier.
Disab – This unit is not the IP Bus Master.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ▲

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-37

C. Configuration Options

Table C-9.

General Management Configuration Options (7 of 7)

Def Netwk: None
Next None IPBus
EDL4 Prev

Com

Modem

Aux

FDL

EDL1

EDL2

EDL3

Default Network Destination. Specifies the default network destination. This configuration
option specifies where the default network is connected. For example, if the default
network is connected to the communication port, you select Com. If the default network is
connected to the far-end 31xx Series device over the FDL, you select FDL. The routing
protocol uses the default network destination to route data that does not have a specific
route.
None – No default network destination. Data that cannot be routed is discarded.
IPBus – The default network destination is the IP Bus on the carrier backplane. This
selection only appears for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs which are not configured as the IP
Bus Master.
Com – The default network destination is the communication port. This selection only
appears if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt.
Modem – The default network destination is the modem port. This selection only appears
if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt. This selection does not appear on
carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Aux – The default network destination is the auxiliary port. This selection only appears if
the Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt.
FDL – The default network destination is FDL. This selection only appears if the FDL
management link is enabled.
EDLn – For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs, the default network destination is the EDLn port
(where n is 1–4). This selection only appears in 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs if the
synchronous data port’s EDL management link is enabled.
NOTE: If the chosen default network link is disabled or down, data is discarded. Return
to this menu and choose another default network.

C-38

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-10. Management Trap Configuration Options (1 of 3)
Num Trap Mgrs: 1
Next 1 2 3 4

Number of Trap Managers. Specifies the number of SNMP trap managers that are to
receive traps for this unit.
NOTE: You must configure an IP address for each trap manager that is to receive trap
messages.
Trapn IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear

Trap n IP Address. Specifies the IP address for each trap manager. This configuration
option is repeated for all trap managers supported by the unit.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the IP address for Trap Manager n.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for Trap Manager n. The IP address is set to
000.000.000.000.
Trapn Dst: None
Next None IPBus
EDL4 Prev

Com

Modem

Aux

FDL

EDL1

EDL2

EDL3

Trap Manager n Destination. Specifies the network destination for Trap Manager n. This
configuration option is displayed for the number of trap managers (n) specified by the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
None – No Trap Manager n network destination. Traps are discarded.
IPBus – The Trap Manager n network destination is the IP Bus on the carrier backplane.
This selection only appears for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs which are not configured as
the IP Bus Master.
Com – The Trap Manager n network destination is the communication port. This selection
only appears if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
Modem – The Trap Manager n network destination is the modem port. This selection only
appears if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt. This selection does not
appear on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Aux – The Trap Manager n network destination is the auxiliary port. This selection only
appears if the Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
FDL – The Trap Manager n network destination is the FDL management link. This
selection only appears if the FDL management link is enabled.
EDLn – The Trap Manager n network destination is the EDLn port (where n is 1–4). This
selection only appears if the synchronous data port’s EDL management link is enabled.
NOTE: If the chosen destination link is disabled or down, the traps are discarded.
Return to this menu and choose another destination.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-39

C. Configuration Options

Table C-10. Management Trap Configuration Options (2 of 3)
Gen Trap: Both
Next Disab Warm

Auth

Both

General Trap Types. Specifies the general trap types to enable.
Disab – Disables the sending of trap messages for warmStart and authenticationFailure
events.
Warm – Sends trap messages for warmStart events to the currently configured trap
manager(s).
Auth – Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events to the currently configured
trap manager(s).
Both – Sends trap messages for warmStart and authenticationFailure events to the
currently configured trap manager(s).
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the SNMP Trap configuration option
(see Alarm Configuration Options on page C-28) is disabled.
Entp Trap: Enab
Next Enab Disab

Enterprise Specific Traps. Specifies whether enterpriseSpecific traps are enabled.
Enab – Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events to the currently configured
trap manager(s).
Disab – Disables the sending of trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the SNMP Trap configuration option
(see Alarm Configuration Options on page C-28) is disabled.
Link Trap: Both
Next Disab Up

Down

Both

Link Trap Type. Specifies the link trap type to enable. Interfaces monitored for linkUp and
linkDown traps are specified with the Trap I/F configuration option.
Disab – Disables the sending of trap messages for linkDown or linkUp events.
Up – Sends trap messages for linkUp events to the currently configured trap manager(s).
Down – Sends trap messages for linkDown events to the currently configured trap
manager(s).
Both – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events to the currently configured
trap manager(s).
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the SNMP Trap configuration option
(see Alarm Configuration Options on page C-28) is disabled.

C-40

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Table C-10. Management Trap Configuration Options (3 of 3)
Trap I/F: All
Next NET

DTE

T1s

Ports

All

Link Trap Interfaces. Specifies which interfaces generate linkUp and linkDown trap
messages. These traps are supported on the T1 interfaces (network and DTE
Drop/Insert) and the synchronous data ports.
NET – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the network
interface.
DTE – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. This selection does not appear if the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface is disabled.
T1s – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the network or
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Ports – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the
synchronous data ports.
All – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the network
interface, DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or the synchronous data ports.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the Link Trap configuration option is
not configured to generate trap messages for linkUp or linkDown events.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-41

C. Configuration Options

Configuration Worksheets
This section contains one set of blank worksheets to be used when configuring
your DSU/CSU in the network. In the tables, default settings for Factory 1 are
indicated by bold type. It is recommended that you copy these blank worksheets
before using them.

C-42

DTE Options

Value (Default in Bold)

DTE Port

Enab, Disab

DTE Framing

D4, ESF

DTE Coding

AMI, B8ZS

Equal

0–133, 133–266, 266–399, 399–533, 533–655

Extrn DLB

Enab, Disab

Send Ones

Enab, Disab

Net Options

Value (Default in Bold)

NET Framing

D4, ESF

NET Coding

AMI, B8ZS

LBO

0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5

ANSI PRM

Enab, Disab

Mgmt Link

Enab, Disab

NET LLB

Enab, Disab

NET PLB

Enab, Disab

BitStuff

62411, Part68, Disab

Circuit Ident

Edit, Clear

General Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Gen Yellow

Enab, Disab

Clock Src

NET, DTE, Prt1, Int, Ext

Clock Rate

2048, 1544, 8

Tst Timeout

Enab, Disab

Tst Duration

1–120 (Default = 10)

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

User Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Self-Test

Enab, Disab

FP Access

●

Enab, Disab

FP Pass

●

Enab, Disab

Dial-In

Enab, Disab

Password

None, Com, Modem, Both

Com Port

▲

Com Use
ComExtDev

Mgmt, ASCII, Daisy, Term
▲

Disab, AT, Other

ComConnPrefix ▲

Edit, Clear

▲

Edit, Clear

ComEscapeSeq ▲

Edit, Clear

ComConnected

ComEscDel

▲

ComDisconnect ▲

3160-A2-GB21-90

Enab, Disab

None, 0.2s, 0.4s, 0.6s, 0.8s, 1.0s
Edit, Clear

Com Type

●

Async, Sync

Com Clk

●

Int, Ext

Com Rate

1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 38.4

Char Length

7, 8

CParity

None, Even, Odd

CStop Bits

1, 1.5, 2

Ignore DTR

Yes, No

CmInActTm

Enab, Disab

CmDiscTm

1–60 (Default = 5)

Modem Use

●

Mgmt, ASCII, Term

Modem Type

●

Async, Sync

Modem Rate

●

1.2, 2.4

MChar Len

●

7, 8

MParity

●

None, Even, Odd

MStop Bits

●

1, 2

LSpaceDisc

●

Enab, Disab

February 2001

C-43

C. Configuration Options

User Options

Value (Default in Bold)

MoInActTm

●

Enab, Disab

MoDiscTm

●

1–60 (Default = 5)

Aux Use

●

None, Mgmt, Daisy

Aux Rate

●

9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 38.4

TnSession

Enab, Disab

TnPaswd

Enab, Disab

TnInActTm

Enab, Disab

TnDiscTm

1–60 (Default = 5)

Alarm Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Alrm Msg

Disab, Modem, Com, Both

SNMP Trap

Enab, Disab

Trap Disc

Enab, Disab

DialOut

Enab, Disab

Call Retry

Enab, Disab

Dial Delay

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

AltDialDir

None, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Err Rate

10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9

Alrm Relay

▲

Enab, Disab

C-44

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

3160-A2-GB21-90

Prt1 Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Type

E530, V.35, RS449, X.21

Base Rate

Nx64, Nx56

Net DCLB

Disab, V.54, FT1, Both

Port LB

Disab, DTLB, DCLB, Both

All Ones

Disab, DTR, RTS, Both

Rcv Yellow

None, Halt

Tx Clock

Int, Ext

InvertTxC

Enab, Disab

InvrtData

Enab, Disab

EDL

Enab, Disab

Err Rate

10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9

Near-end

Disab, Maint, Send, Both

Far-end

Disab, Maint

Mgmt Link

Enab, Disab

Prt2 Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Type

E530, V.35, RS449, X.21

Base Rate

Nx64, Nx56

Net DCLB

Disab, V.54, FT1, Both

Port LB

Disab, DTLB, DCLB, Both

All Ones

Disab, DTR, RTS, Both

Rcv Yellow

None, Halt

Tx Clock

Int, Ext

InvertTxC

Enab, Disab

InvrtData

Enab, Disab

EDL

Enab, Disab

Err Rate

10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9

Near-end

Disab, Maint, Send, Both

Far-end

Disab, Maint

Mgmt Link

Enab, Disab

February 2001

C-45

C. Configuration Options

C-46

Prt3 Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Type

E530, V.35, RS449, X.21

Base Rate

Nx64, Nx56

Net DCLB

Disab, V.54, FT1, Both

Port LB

Disab, DTLB, DCLB, Both

All Ones

Disab, DTR, RTS, Both

Rcv Yellow

None, Halt

Tx Clock

Int, Ext

InvertTxC

Enab, Disab

InvrtData

Enab, Disab

EDL

Enab, Disab

Err Rate

10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9

Near-end

Disab, Maint, Send, Both

Far-end

Disab, Maint

Mgmt Link

Enab, Disab

Prt4 Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Type

E530, V.35, RS449, X.21

Base Rate

Nx64, Nx56

Net DCLB

Disab, V.54, FT1, Both

Port LB

Disab, DTLB, DCLB, Both

All Ones

Disab, DTR, RTS, Both

Rcv Yellow

None, Halt

Tx Clock

Int, Ext

InvertTxC

Enab, Disab

InvrtData

Enab, Disab

EDL

Enab, Disab

Err Rate

10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9

Near-end

Disab, Maint, Send, Both

Far-end

Disab, Maint

Mgmt Link

Enab, Disab

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Network Interface
Network Channel

Allocation

N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
N17
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
N23
N24
Allocations:
N1 – N24 indicates allocation to DTE (Drop/Insert) channels.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-47

C. Configuration Options

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface
DTE (DSX-1) Channel

Allocation

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
Allocations:
D1 – D24 indicates allocation to network channels.

C-48

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

DTE Chan Config

Assign: (N1 – 24)

Voice (RBS or Data)

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-49

C. Configuration Options

Port Chan
Conf

Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Assign To

NET, DTE, Prt2, Prt3, Prt4

Assign By

Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate

If Assign By Block
Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)

Port Rate

Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768

Port 1

Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI

Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)

If Assign By Chan

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)

Assign To

NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt3, Prt4

Assign By

Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate

If Assign By Block
Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)

Port Rate

Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768

Port 2

Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI

If Assign By Chan

C-50

Start At

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Port Chan
Conf

Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Assign To

NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt2, Prt4

Assign By

Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate

If Assign By Block
Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)

Port Rate

Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768

Port 3

Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI

Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)

If Assign By Chan

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)

Assign To

NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt2, Prt3

Assign By

Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate

If Assign By Block
Start At

Time Slot (Nx or Dx ): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)

Port Rate

Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768

Port 4

Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI

If Assign By Chan

3160-A2-GB21-90

Start At

February 2001

C-51

C. Configuration Options

General Mgmt
Options

Value (Default in Bold)

SNMP Mgt

Enab, Disab

NMS Valid

Enab, Disab

Num Sec Mgrs

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

NMS n IP Adr

Edit, Clear

NMS n Access

Read, R/w

System Name

Edit, Clear

System Location

Edit, Clear

System Contact

Edit, Clear

CommunityName1

Edit, Clear

Access 1

Read, R/W

CommunityName2

Edit, Clear

Access 2

Read, R/W

IP Adr

Edit, Clear

NetMask

Edit, Clear

Com IP Adr

Edit, Clear

Com NetMask

Edit, Clear

Com Link

PPP, SLIP

Modem IP Adr

●

Edit, Clear

Mdm NetMask

●

Edit, Clear

Alt Mdm IP Adr

●

Edit, Clear

Alt Mdm NetMask ●

Edit, Clear

Modem Link

●

PPP, SLIP

Aux IP Adr

●

Edit, Clear

Aux NetMask

●

Edit, Clear

IPBusMast

▲

Enab, Disab

Def Netwk

C-52

None, IPBus, Com, Modem, Aux, FDL, EDLn

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

C. Configuration Options

Mgmt Trap Options

Value (Default in Bold)

Num Trap Mgrs

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Trapn IP Adr

Edit, Clear

Trapn Dst

None, IPBus, Com, Modem, Aux, FDL, EDLn

Gen Trap

Disab, Warm, Auth, Both

Entp Trap

Enab, Disab

Link Trap

Disab, Up, Down, Both

Trap I/F

NET, DTE, T1s, Ports, All

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

C-53

C. Configuration Options

C-54

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Pin Assignments

D
Overview
The DSU/CSU is shipped with a power module and a VF cable. Various other
interconnecting cables are available. For cable feature numbers, refer to
Appendix I, Equipment List. This appendix describes connector pin assignments
and cables.

T1 Network Interface
The T1 network interface connector is an RJ48C, 8-position, unkeyed modular jack
(Table D-1, T1 Network Interface Connector).
The T1 line interface cable is a 20-foot, 24 AWG solid, 2-twisted pair cable that is
either RJ48C-to-RJ48C (Figure D-1, T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-RJ48C) or
RJ48C-to-DA15P (Figure D-2, T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-DA15P).
Table D-1.

3160-A2-GB21-90

T1 Network Interface Connector

Signal

Pin Number

Receive Ring

Receive Tip

Transmit Ring

Transmit Tip

February 2001

D-1

D. Pin Assignments

RJ48C
PLUG
UNKEYED

RJ48C
PLUG
UNKEYED
1

RECEIVE RING

RECEIVE TIP

BLUE

TWISTED PAIR

WHITE

ORANGE

3
4

TRANSMIT RING

TRANSMIT TIP

3
TWISTED PAIR

WHITE

4
5

493-14156-01

Figure D-1.

T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-RJ48C

RJ48C
PLUG
UNKEYED
RECEIVE RING

RECEIVE TIP

DA15P
PLUG
BLUE

BLUE

WHITE/BLUE

RECEIVE RING

RECEIVE TIP

TRANSMIT RING

TRANSMIT TIP

3
TRANSMIT RING

TRANSMIT TIP

ORANGE

WHITE/ORANGE

6
7

493-14342

Figure D-2.

D-2

T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-DA15P

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

D. Pin Assignments

DTE Drop/Insert Interface
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface connector is a DB15-type socket
connector (Table D-2, DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Connector). For information about
using Relay Contact Sense for external DTE loopback, refer to the Extrn DLB
configuration option in DTE Interface Configuration Options in Appendix C,
Configuration Options.
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) cable (Figure D-3, DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Cable)
is typically supplied by a DTE vendor. It is made of shielded twisted-pair wires
(22 AWG). The cable connector is a DB15-type plug connector. Be sure to connect
the shield ground only at the DSU/CSU end to prevent ground loops.
Table D-2.

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Connector

Signal

Pin Number

Receiver Tip from DTE

Receiver Ring from DTE

Transmitter Tip to DTE

Transmitter Ring to DTE

Relay Contact Sense Return

Relay Contact Sense

Shield Ground

2, 4

DB15
PLUG
TWISTED PAIR

TO
DTE
TWISTED PAIR

EXTERNAL
RELAY
CONTACT

RECEIVE TIP

RECEIVE RING

SHIELD GROUND

TRANSMIT TIP

TRANSMIT RING

SHIELD GROUND

RETURN

SENSE

494-14152-02

Figure D-3.

3160-A2-GB21-90

DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Cable

February 2001

D-3

D. Pin Assignments

MODEM Port Interface
The integral modem port connector is a 4-position, RJ11C-like modular jack
(Table D-3, Modem Port Interface).
The integral modem VF cable is a 14.5-foot, 26 AWG, 4-conductor keyed cable
with an RJ11C-like plug connector (Figure D-4, Integral Modem Cable). This cable
is supplied with your standalone DSU/CSU.
Table D-3.

Modem Port Interface

Signal

Pin Number

VF Ring

VF Tip

RJ11
PLUG

RING

TIP

493-14157-01

Figure D-4.

D-4

Integral Modem Cable

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

D. Pin Assignments

AUX Port Interface
The Auxiliary (AUX) port connects to the LAN Adapter for SNMP or Telnet
applications, or to another DSU/CSU’s COM port for daisy chain connectivity. (The
SNMP LAN Adapter includes the cable that is needed to attach it to the
DSU/CSU.) The AUX port connector is an 8-position unkeyed modular connector
for the Model 3160 DSU/CSU (Table D-4, AUX Port Connector for Model 3160
DSU/CSUs) and a DB25-type socket connector for Model 3164 and 3165
DSU/CSUs (Table D-5, AUX Port Connector for Model 3164 and 3165
DSU/CSUs).

NOTE:
For daisy-chaining an AUX port to a COM port, an 8-pin-to-8-pin cable
(Model 3160) or 25-pin-to-8-pin cable (Model 3164 or 3165) is required. The
configuration options Com Use and Aux Use must be set to Daisy. Whenever
the cable is connected or disconnected, change the Com Use and Aux Use
configuration options to the correct values.

Table D-4.
Signal

Direction

Pin Number

DTE Transmit Clock

From DSU/CSU

DTE Receive Data

To DSU/CSU

Signal Ground

—

DTE Transmit Data

From DSU/CSU

DTE Receive Clock

From DSU/CSU

Table D-5.

3160-A2-GB21-90

AUX Port Connector for Model 3160 DSU/CSUs

AUX Port Connector for Model 3164 and 3165 DSU/CSUs

Signal

Direction

Pin Number

DTE Transmit Clock

From DSU/CSU

DTE Receive Data

To DSU/CSU

Signal Ground

—

DTE Transmit Data

From DSU/CSU

DTE Receive Clock

From DSU/CSU

February 2001

D-5

D. Pin Assignments

COM Port Interface
The COM port connects to a PC for front panel emulation, to an ASCII terminal or
printer for alarms, to an async terminal, to a network device (e.g., a router) for
SNMP or Telnet applications, to the LAN Adapter for SNMP or Telnet applications,
or to another DSU/CSU’s AUX port for daisy chain connectivity. (The SNMP LAN
Adapter includes the cable that is needed to attach it to the DSU/CSU.) The
COM port connector is an 8-position keyed modular connector (Table D-6, COM
Port Connector). The data signals on this port are referenced to a DTE interface.
The COM port-to-PC cable is shown in Figure D-5, COM Port-to-PC Cable, and
the COM port-to-terminal/printer cable is shown in Figure D-6, COM
Port-to-Terminal/Printer Cable.

NOTE:
For daisy-chaining an AUX port to a COM port, a 25-pin-to-8-pin cable is
required and the appropriate configuration options (Com Use and Aux Use)
must be set to Daisy. Whenever the cable is connected or disconnected, you
should change the Daisy selection to ensure that the correct parameters have
been negotiated for the link layer.

Table D-6.

D-6

COM Port Connector

Signal

Direction

Pin Number

DCE Transmit Clock

From DSU/CSU

DCE Receive Data

From DSU/CSU

Signal Ground

—

DCE Transmit Data

To DSU/CSU

DCE Data Terminal Ready

To DSU/CSU

DCE Carrier Detect

From DSU/CSU

DCE Request-to-Send

To DSU/CSU

DCE Receive Clock

From DSU/CSU

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

D. Pin Assignments

8-POSITION
MODULAR
PLUG KEYED
1

NO CONNECTION

DB9
SOCKET

RX DATA

GROUND

TX DATA

DTR

RTS

CTS

DSR

RTS

NO CONNECTION

494-14153-02

Figure D-5.

COM Port-to-PC Cable

8-POSITION
MODULAR
PLUG KEYED

DB25
PLUG

RX DATA

GROUND

TX DATA

DTR

RTS

CTS

DSR

RTS

494-14154-02

Figure D-6.

3160-A2-GB21-90

COM Port-to-Terminal/Printer Cable

February 2001

D-7

D. Pin Assignments

EIA-530-A Port Interface Connector
The EIA-530-A Port interface connector information is shown in Table D-7,
EIA-530-A Port Interface Connector.
Table D-7.

D-8

EIA-530-A Port Interface Connector

Signal

Circuit
Mnemonic

ITU-T Number Direction

Shield

—

Signal Common

102A

—

Signal Common

102B

—

Transmitted Data

103

To DSU/CSU

2 (A)
14 (B)

Received Data

104

From DSU/CSU

3 (A)
16 (B)

Request-to-Send

105

To DSU/CSU

4 (A)
19 (B)

Clear-to-Send

106

From DSU/CSU

5 (A)
13 (B)

Received Line
Signal Detector

109

From DSU/CSU

8 (A)
10 (B)

DCE Ready

107

From DSU/CSU

DTE Ready

108/1, /2

To DSU/CSU

Transmit Signal
Element Timing
(DTE Source)

113

To DSU/CSU

11 (B)
24 (A)

Transmit Signal
Element Timing
(DCE Source)

114

From DSU/CSU

12 (B)
15 (A)

Receiver Signal
Element Timing
(DCE Source)

115

From DSU/CSU

17 (A)
9 (B)

Local Loopback

141

To DSU/CSU

Remote Loopback RL

140

To DSU/CSU

Test Mode

142

From DSU/CSU

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

D. Pin Assignments

EIA-530-A-to-RS-449 Cable Interface
The EIA-530-A-to-RS-449 adapter (Figure D-7, EIA-530-A-to-RS-449 Adapter)
provides the RS-449 interface shown in Table D-8, RS-449 Cable Interface.

530 DB25
SIGNAL PLUG
SHIELD
TD-A
TD-B
RD-A
RD-B
TXC-A
TXC-B
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS-A
RTS-B
CTS-A
CTS-B
DTR
RLSD-A
RLSD-B
DSR
SIG. COMMON
RL
LL
RCV. COMMON
TT-A
TT-B
TM
SIG. COMMON

DB37
SOCKET

1
2
14
3
16
15
12
17
9
4
19
5
13
20
8
10
6
7
21
18
23
24
11
25
22

449
SIGNAL

1
4
22
6
24
5
23
8
26
7
25
9
27
12
13
31
11
19
14
10
20
17
35
18

SHIELD
TD-A
TD-B
RD-A
RD-B
TXC-A
TXC-B
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS-A
RTS-B
CTS-A
CTS-B
DTR-A
RR-A
RR-B
DM-A
SIG. COMMON
RL
LL
RCV. COMMON
TT-A
TT-B
TM

29
30

DM-B
DTR-B
495-14323-01

Figure D-7.

3160-A2-GB21-90

EIA-530-A-to-RS-449 Adapter

February 2001

D-9

D. Pin Assignments

Table D-8.

D-10

RS-449 Cable Interface

Signal

Circuit
Mnemonic

ITU-T
Number

Direction

Shield

—

Signal Ground

102A

—

Receive Ground

102B

—

Send Common

—

Send Data

103

To DSU/CSU

4 (A)
22 (B)

Receive Data

104

From
DSU/CSU

6 (A)
24 (B)

Request-to-Send

105

To DSU/CSU

7 (A)
25 (B)

Clear-to-Send

106

From
DSU/CSU

9 (A)
27 (B)

Receiver Ready

109

From
DSU/CSU

13 (A)
31 (B)

Data Mode

107

From
DSU/CSU

11 (A)
29 (B)

Terminal Ready

108/1, /2

To DSU/CSU

12 (A)
30 (B)

Terminal Timing

113

To DSU/CSU

17 (A)
35 (B)

Send Timing

114

From
DSU/CSU

5 (A)
23 (B)

Receive Timing

115

From
DSU/CSU

8 (A)
26 (B)

Local Loopback

141

To DSU/CSU

Remote Loopback

140

To DSU/CSU

Test Mode

142

From
DSU/CSU

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

D. Pin Assignments

EIA-530-A-to-V.35 Cable Interface
The EIA-530-A-to-V.35 adapter (Figure D-8, EIA-530-A-to-V.35 Adapter) provides
the V.35 interface shown in Table D-9, V.35 Cable Interface.
530 DB25
SIGNAL PLUG
SHIELD
TD-A
TD-B
RD-A
RD-B
TXC-A
TXC-B
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS
CTS
RLSD
DSR
SIG. COMMON
TT-A
TT-B
DTR
RL
LL
TM
SIG. COMMON

MS34
SOCKET

1
2
14
3
16
15
12
17
9
4
5
8
6
7
24
11
20
21
18
25
23

A
P
S
R
T
Y
AA
V
X
C
D
F
E
B
U
W
H
N
L
NN

V.35
SIGNAL
SHIELD
TD-A
TD-B
RD-A
RD-B
TXC-A
TXC-B
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS
CTS
RLSD
DSR
SIG. COMMON
TT-A
TT-B
DTR
RL
LL
TM

497-15233

Figure D-8.

3160-A2-GB21-90

EIA-530-A-to-V.35 Adapter

February 2001

D-11

D. Pin Assignments

Table D-9.

D-12

V.35 Cable Interface

Signal

ITU-T Number

Direction

Shield

—

Signal Common

102

—

Transmitted Data

103

To DSU/CSU

P (A)
S (B)

Received Data

104

From DSU/CSU

R (A)
T (B)

Request to Send

105

To DSU/CSU

Clear to Send

106

From DSU/CSU

Data Channel Received
Line Signal Detector

109

From DSU/CSU

Data Set Ready

107

From DSU/CSU

Data Terminal Ready

108/1, /2

To DSU/CSU

Transmit Signal Element
Timing (DTE Source)

113

To DSU/CSU

U (A)
W (B)

Transmit Signal Element
Timing (DCE Source)

114

From DSU/CSU

Y (A)
AA (B)

Receiver Signal
Element Timing (DCE
Source)

115

From DSU/CSU

V (A)
X (B)

Local Loopback

141

To DSU/CSU

Loopback/Maintenance

140

To DSU/CSU

Test Indicator

142

From DSU/CSU

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

D. Pin Assignments

EIA-530-A-to-X.21 Cable Interface
The EIA-530-A-to-X.21 adapter (Figure D-9, EIA-530-A-to-X.21 Adapter) provides
the X.21 interface shown in Table D-10, X.21 Cable Interface.

530 DB25
SIGNAL PLUG
TD-A
TD-B
RD-A
RD-B
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS-A
RTS-B
RLSD-A
RLSD-B
SIG. COMMON
TT-A
TT-B

DB15
SOCKET

2
14
3
16
17
9
4
19
8
10
7
24
11

2
9
4
11
6
13
3
10
5
12
8
7
14

X.21
SIGNAL
TD-A
TD-B
RD-A
RD-B
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS-A
RTS-B
RLSD-A
RLSD-B
SIG. COMMON
TT-A
TT-B
495-14787

Figure D-9.

EIA-530-A-to-X.21 Adapter

Table D-10. X.21 Cable Interface

3160-A2-GB21-90

Signal

ITU-T Number

Direction

Signal Common

102

—

Transmitted Data

103

To DSU/CSU 2 (A)
9 (B)

Received Data

104

From
DSU/CSU

Request-to-Send

105

To DSU/CSU 3 (A)
10 (B)

Data Channel Received
Line Signal Detector

109

From
DSU/CSU

Transmit Signal Element
Timing (DTE Source)

113

To DSU/CSU 7 (A)
14 (B)

Receiver Signal Element
Timing (DCE Source)

115

From
DSU/CSU

February 2001

4 (A)
11 (B)

5 (A)
12 (B)

6 (A)
13 (B)

D-13

D. Pin Assignments

Serial Crossover Cable
Use a serial crossover cable like the one shown in Figure D-10, Serial Crossover
Cable (with an adapter like that shown in Figure D-10) to connect an external
modem to the DSU/CSU’s COM port.
Pin 14

P1
Plug

Pin 1

P2
Plug

Pin 14

Pin 25

Pin 13
Pin 25

Pin 13
Pin

Chassis Ground

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

DSR

Signal Ground

CD (RLSD)

DTR

497-15180a

Figure D-10. Serial Crossover Cable

D-14

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

D. Pin Assignments

Power Input Connector
The input power connector leads are shown in Table D-11, DC Power Connector.
Pin 1 is at the lower right of the connector and Pin 6 at the upper left as you face
the back of the unit.
Table D-11. DC Power Connector
Signal

Pin Number

–48 Vdc Return

1, 2

–48 Vdc A

–48 Vdc B

+24 Vdc

+24 Vdc Return

Chassis Ground

99-16291

Optional DC Power Cable
The dc power cable (Figure D-11, DC Power Cable) is a 14.5-foot, 18 AWG
stranded cable. The connector is terminated at one end with a 6-position
connector. The other end of the cable is terminated with a bare wire that should be
connected to a dc power source. Figure D-11, DC Power Cable shows the wire
colors. The power source can be either a single source of +24 Vdc or up to two
sources of –48 Vdc (A and B). You cannot connect +24 Vdc and –48 Vdc to the
same unit. See the installation instructions in Chapter 2, Installation.

Figure D-11. DC Power Cable

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

D-15

D. Pin Assignments

External Clock Interface
The External Clock connector pinouts are in Table D-12, External Clock
Connector.
Table D-12. External Clock Connector

D-16

Signal

Pin Number

Shield

Clock (+) (RS422 only)

Clock (–) (RS422 only)

Clock In (RS423 only)

Signal Common

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

SNMP MIB Objects

E
Overview
This appendix describes the Management Information Base (MIB) objects that are
supported by the DSU/CSU and provides a correlation between front panel
commands and MIB objects (Table E-1, SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command
Cross-Reference).
The DSU/CSU supports the following MIBs:

MIB II (RFC 1213)
Defines the general objects for use in Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) internets and provides general information about the
DSU/CSU.

DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406)
Defines objects for managing DS1 interfaces and supports the network and
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces on the DSU/CSU.

RS-232-like MIB (RFC 1317)
Defines objects for managing RS-232-type interfaces and supports
synchronous data ports (PORTs 1– 4) and management communication ports
(AUX, MODEM, and COM ports) on the DSU/CSU.

Generic-Interface MIB Extensions (RFC 1229)
An extension to MIB II that defines additional objects for control of generic
interfaces in MIB II. It supports control of tests on the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) and synchronous data interfaces that are not supported by other
MIBs.

Enterprise MIB
Defines objects that are unique to devices such as Model 316x DSU/CSUs.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

E-1

E. SNMP MIB Objects

MIB II (RFC 1213)
The objects defined by MIB II are organized into 10 different groups. The
DSU/CSU implements only those groups where the semantics of the group are
applicable to the implementation of a DSU/CSU. The MIB II object groups
supported or not supported by the 3100 Series devices are as follows:

E-2

System
Group

Supported.

Interface
Group

Supported for the network interface, the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface, the synchronous data ports, the COM port,
the AUX port, and the MODEM port. Interface statistics
(counters) apply to any port (COM, AUX, or MODEM),
whichever is defined as the SNMP management link.

Address
Translation
Group

Not supported since this group is not supported in MIB II.

IP Group

Supported.

ICMP Group

Supported.

TCP Group

Supported.

UDP Group

Supported.

EGP Group

Not supported since the EGP protocol is not supported by the
DSU/CSU.

Transmission
Group

Supported on the T1 interfaces using the DS1/E1 MIB.
Supported on the synchronous data ports using the
RS-232-like MIB. Supported on the COM, AUX, and MODEM
ports using the RS-232-like MIB.

SNMP Group

Supported.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

System Group, MIB II
The System Group objects are fully supported by the DSU/CSU. The following
sections provide clarification for objects contained in the System Group where it is
not otherwise clear how the object definition in MIB II is related to the DSU/CSU.
Objects not mentioned are supported as stated in the MIB.
System Group – “sysDescr” Object (system 1)
This object provides the full name and version identification for the system
hardware and software. This object displays the following string:
[Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU; model xxxx-xx-xxx; S/W Release: yy.yy.yy; H/W
CCA1: zzzz-zzz; H/W CCA2: zzzz-zzz; Serial number: ssssssss.
Where:

xxxx-xx-xxx represents the full model number of the unit.
yy.yy.yy represents the software revision number of the unit.
zzzz-zzz represents the hardware revision number of the unit.
ssssssss represents the serial number of the unit.
System Group – “sysObjectID” Object (system 2)
This object provides the authoritative identification of the network management
subsystem contained in the unit.
This object displays the following object identifier:
3160
3164
3165
3161

[Company OID].1.14.2.2.1
[Company OID].1.14.2.2.2
[Company OID].1.14.2.2.3
[Company OID].1.14.2.2.4

System group – “sysContact” Object (system 4)
This object provides a textual identification of the contact person for this managed
node.
System Group – “sysName” Object (system 5)
This object provides an administratively assigned name for this managed node.
System Group – “sysLocation” Object (system 6)
This object provides the physical location of this node.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

E-3

E. SNMP MIB Objects

System Group – “sysServices” Object (system 7)
This object provides a value which indicates the set of services that are potentially
offered by the DSU/CSU. Only the following values are supported.

physical(1) – Layer 1 functionality for all interfaces.
datalink/subnetwork(2) – Layer 2 functionality (SLIP, PPP) for the COM, AUX,
and MODEM ports.
internet(4) – Layer 3 functionality (IP) for all management links.
end-to-end(8) – Layer 4 functionality (UDP) for all management links.

Therefore, set this object to 15 (the sum of 1 + 2 + 4 + 8).

Interface Group, MIB II
The Interfaces Group consists of an object indicating the number of interfaces
supported by the unit and an interface table containing an entry for each interface.
The DSU/CSU provides an entry in the interface table for the network interface, the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, each of the synchronous data ports (1, 2, or 4
depending on the model), the COM port, the AUX port, and the MODEM port, if
they apply. The following sections provide clarification for objects contained in the
Interface Group where it is not clear how the object definition in MIB II is related to
the DSU/CSU.
Interface Group – “ifNumber” Object (interfaces 1)
This variable contains the maximum number of MIB II supported interfaces
possible across the 31xx Series product line (9). This is different from the MIB
description, which is defined as the number of interfaces on the particular device.
This change allows the use of the same ifIndexes across all 31xx Series models.
Interface Group – “ifIndex” Object (ifEntry 1)
This object provides the index into the ifTable and typically into tables in other
MIBs also. The values of the ifIndex object do not vary between models even
though not all indexes are supported for a particular model. When an unsupported
index is accessed, “noSuchName” is returned.
The following are the values of the ifIndexes for all DSU/CSU models:

E-4

1 – Net T1
2 – DTE T1
3 – COM port
4 – Modem port
5 – Auxiliary RS-232 port
6 – DCE port 1
7 – DCE port 2
8 – DCE port 3
9 – DCE port 4

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

The supported ifIndexes for the 3160 DSU/CSU are:

Net T1
DTE T1
COM port
Modem port
Auxiliary RS-232 port
DCE port 1
DCE port 2

The supported ifIndexes for the 3161 carrier DSU/CSU are:

Net T1
DTE T1
COM port (if configured)
DCE port 1
DCE port 2 (if configured)

The supported ifIndexes for the 3164 DSU/CSU are:

Net T1
DTE T1
COM port
Modem port
Auxiliary RS-232 port
DCE port 1
DCE port 2
DCE port 3
DCE port 4

The supported ifIndexes for the 3165 DSU/CSU are:

3160-A2-GB21-90

Net T1
COM port
Modem port
DCE port 1

February 2001

E-5

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Interface Group – “ifDescr” Object (ifEntry 2)
This object provides information about the interface. Each interface displays a text
string as shown below:
Network T1:

“Network T1. [Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version: [CCA number for the CSU board]”.

DTE T1:

“DTE T1. [Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version: [CCA number for the CSU board]”.

COM:

“COM port. [Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version: [CCA number for the CSU board for the standalone,
or the CCA number for the DSU board for the carrier]”.

Modem:

“MODEM port. [Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version: [CCA number for the CSU board]”.

AUX:

“AUX port. [Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version: [CCA number for the CSU board]”.

Data Ports:

“Data Port n. [Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version: [CCA number for the DSU board]”
(where n is 1 to 4).

Interface Group – “ifType” Object (ifEntry 3)
This object identifies the type of the interface based on the physical/link protocol(s)
immediately below the network layer. Only the following values are supported by
the DSU/CSU:

ds1 – Used for the network and DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces.
propPointToPointSerial(22) – Used for the synchronous data ports. Used for
the MODEM or COM port when the port is not configured as the SNMP
management interface.
ppp(23) – Used for the MODEM, AUX, or COM port when the port is
configured for PPP.
slip(28) – Used for the MODEM or COM port when the port is configured for
SLIP.

Interface Group – “ifMtu” Object (ifEntry 4)
This object identifies the largest datagram that can be sent or received on the
interface. It is applicable only to the interface configured as the SNMP
management link. This object is zero for all other interfaces.

E-6

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Interface Group – “ifSpeed” Object (ifEntry 5)
This object provides the interface’s current bandwidth in bits per second. The
value of this object for each interface is specified as follows:
T1 Interfaces:

1,544,000 bps.

COM, AUX, and
MODEM:

The currently configured data rate for the port.

Data Ports:

The currently configured data rate for the port when the port
is allocated to one of the T1 interfaces. If the port is not
allocated the data rate is defined as zero.

Interface Group – “ifAdminStatus” Object (ifEntry 7)
This object specifies the desired state (configuration) of the interface. This object
is supported only for the COM and MODEM ports. It provides the ability to switch
between using the port for SNMP or ASCII operations (dial-out, front panel
emulation). The value of this object will not affect the state of any of the interfaces
on the DSU/CSU other than the COM or MODEM port. Only the following values
are supported by the DSU/CSU:

3160-A2-GB21-90

up(1) – The SNMP management link is active on the COM or MODEM port.
testing(3) – The SNMP management link is inactive on the COM or MODEM
port. These ports can be used for proprietary ASCII functions.

February 2001

E-7

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Interface Group – “ifOperStatus” Object (ifEntry 8)
This object specifies the current operational state of the interface. The value of this
object for each interface is defined as follows:
Network T1:

The interface is up(1) when no alarm conditions exist.
The interface is down(2) when an alarm condition is active.
The interface is testing(3) when a test is active on the interface.

DTE T1:

The interface is up(1) when no alarm conditions exist and the
interface is enabled.
The interface is down(2) when an alarm condition is active and
the interface is disabled.
The interface is testing(3) when a test is active on the interface.

COM Port:

When configured as an SNMP management link, up and down
are based on the current state of the link layer protocol.
Otherwise, the interface is always up(1).
The interface is never in the testing(3) state.

AUX Port:

When configured as an SNMP management link, up and down
are based on the current state of the link layer protocol.
Otherwise, the interface is always down(2).
The interface is never in the testing(3) state.

MODEM
Port:

When configured as an SNMP management link, up and down
are based on the current state of the link layer protocol.
Otherwise, the interface is always up(1) when the modem is
connected and down(2) when the modem is not connected.
The interface is never in the testing(3) state.

Data Ports:

The interface is up(1) when the port is assigned to a T1
interface or another data port as a backup, and both CTS and
DSR are ON.
The interface is down(2) when the port is unassigned, or either
CTS or DSR is OFF.
The interface is testing(3) when a test is active on the interface.

Interface Group – “ifLastChange” Object (ifEntry 9)
This object contains the value of “sysUpTime" at the time the interface entered its
current operational state.

E-8

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Interface Group – Input Counters (objects ifEntry 10 to ifEntry 15)
These objects collect statistics on the data received by the COM port, the AUX
port, and the MODEM port when these ports are configured as SNMP
management links. For interfaces that are not configured as an SNMP
management link, these statistics are not provided and an error status is returned
if access is attempted. The objects used to collect input statistics are listed below:

ifInOctets (ifEntry 10)
ifInUcastPkts (ifEntry 11)
ifInNUcastPkts (ifEntry 12)
ifInDiscards (ifEntry 13)
ifInErrors (ifEntry 14)
ifInUnknownProtos (ifEntry 15)

Interface Group – Output Counters (objects ifEntry 16 to ifEntry 21)
These objects collect statistics on the data received by the COM port, the AUX
port, and the MODEM port when these ports are configured as SNMP
management links. For interfaces that are not configured as an SNMP
management link, these statistics are not provided and an error status is returned
if access is attempted. The objects used to collect output statistics are listed
below:

3160-A2-GB21-90

ifOutOctets (ifEntry 16)
ifOutUcastPkts (ifEntry 17)
ifOutNUcastPkts (ifEntry 18)
ifOutDiscards (ifEntry 19)
ifOutErrors (ifEntry 20)
ifOutQLen (ifEntry 21)

February 2001

E-9

E. SNMP MIB Objects

IP Group, MIB II
The IP Group objects are supported by the DSU/CSU for all data paths which
currently are configured to carry IP data to or from the DSU/CSU, including the
MODEM, COM, AUX, carrier SNMP bus, EDL, and FDL. All of the objects in the IP
Group other than the IP Address Translation table are fully supported. The IP
Address Translation table (ipNetToMediaTable) does not apply to the DSU/CSU
and will be empty (i.e., have zero entries). The following sections provide
clarification for objects contained in the IP Group when it is not clear how the
object definition in MIB II is related to the DSU/CSU.
IP Group – “ipForwarding” Object (ip 1)
This object specifies whether the unit is acting as an IP gateway in respect to the
forwarding of a datagram received by, but not addressed to, this unit. Only the
following value is supported by the DSU/CSU.

forwarding(1) – The unit is acting as a gateway.

IP Group – “ipAddrTable” Object (ip 20)
The address table is supported by the DSU/CSU.
IP Group – “ipAdEntAddr” Object (ipAddrEntry 1)
The ipAdEntAddr object is an IP address supported by the device and serves as
the index to the address table. Since indexes for tables must be unique, only one
ifIndex may be displayed for each IP address supported by the device. If you have
configured the same IP address for multiple interfaces or for default IP addresses,
you will not see all interfaces that support a particular IP address upon display of
the ipAddrTable.
IP Group – “ipAdEntIfIndex” Object (ipAddrEntry 2)
For some address table entries, the ipAdEntIfIndex object may have a value
greater than ifNumber. In these cases, the ipAdEntIfIndex refers to a proprietary
interface which is not currently implemented by the interface group of MIB II.

E-10

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

IP Group – “ipRouteTable” Object (ip 21)
The routing table used by the DSU/CSU is supported as a read/write table. Entries
in this table may be added, deleted, or changed. You should exercise great caution
when adding or modifying routes in the ipRoutingTable. In general, it should not be
necessary to add or modify routes in the DSU/CSU. In those cases where it is
deemed necessary, the routes should only be added to the connected device
(i.e., the device closest to the destination). Internal routing mechanisms will
propagate the route to the other devices.
An existing route may be effectively deleted by setting the ipRouteType object to
“invalid” for the entry to be deleted. An existing route may be modified by changing
fields in the desired entry (indexed by ipRouteDest) of the routing table. A new
route may be added by specifying values for a table entry for which the index
(“ipRouteDest”) does not already exist.
To add a route using an SNMP set, you must specify a group of minimal objects.
These variable bindings must be contained in a single Protocol Data Unit (PDU).
The objects are described in more detail in the following sections. The minimal set
consists of:

ipRouteDest
ipRouteIfIndex

The following objects are defaulted if not specified in the set PDU used to add a
route.

ipRouteMetric1 – Defaulted to 1 hop.
ipRouteMetric2 – Defaulted to current slot for carrier devices and –1 for
standalone devices.
ipRouteType – Defaulted to indirect.
ipRouteMask – Defaulted as specified in the MIB description.

The following objects are unused in the DSU/CSU and setting them will have no
effect on the operation of the IP implementation.

ipRouteMetric3, ipRouteMetric4, ipRouteMetric5 – Defaulted to –1 as
specified in the MIB.
ipRouteNextHop – Defaulted to 0.0.0.0.

The following read-only objects must not be specified in the set PDU used to add a
route.

3160-A2-GB21-90

ipRouteProto – Set to netmgmt(3) by software.
ipRouteAge – Defaulted to 999.
ipRouteInfo – Set to OBJECT IDENTIFIER {0, 0} since it is unused.

February 2001

E-11

E. SNMP MIB Objects

IP Group – “ipRouteDest” Object (ipRouteEntry 1)
The ipRouteDest object serves as the index to the routing table. Since indexes for
tables must be unique, only one route per destination may appear in the table. To
ensure that no duplicate destinations appear in the routing table, the ipRouteDest
object of the ipRouteTable will be treated as described in RFC 1354 (IP
Forwarding Table MIB):
“The destination IP address of this route. An entry with a value of 0.0.0.0 is
considered a default route. This object may not take a Multicast (Class D) address
value. Any assignment (implicit or otherwise) of an instance of this object to a
value x must be rejected if the bitwise logical – AND of x with the value of the
corresponding instance of the ipForwardMask object is not equal to x.”
IP Group – “ipRouteIfIndex” Object (ipRouteEntry 1)
When the routing table is displayed, the ipRouteIfIndex object for some entries
may have a value greater than ifNumber. In these cases, the ipRouteIfIndex refers
to a proprietary interface which is not currently implemented by the interface group
of MIB II. Route entries with an unrecognized ipRouteIfIndex value should not be
deleted.
When setting this object via SNMP, the ipRouteIfIndex value can only assume an
appropriate value of ifIndex defined for the particular device type.
IP Group – “ipRouteMetric2” Object (ipRouteEntry 4)
The following values are displayed for the ipRouteMetric2 object. For a carrier
device designated as the IP Bus Master, ipRouteMetric2 is used to designate the
slot number of the next hop associated with this route if the destination is not
connected to the device. For carrier devices not designated as the IP Bus Master
or IP Bus Master devices in which the destination is connected to the device,
ipRouteMetric2 contains the slot number (0-15) of the carrier device. For
standalone devices, ipRouteMetric2 is not used and contains –1.
When adding a route to the routing table using SNMP, do not specify a value for
ipRouteMetric2.
IP Group – “ipRouteProto” Object (ipRouteEntry 9)
This object is a read-only object and may have the following values in the
DSU/CSU.

E-12

other(1) – Temporary route added by IP.
local(2) – Route added or modified as a result of user configuration via the
front panel.
netmgmt(3) – Route added or modified by means of an SNMP set.
icmp(4) – Route added or modified by Internet Control Management Protocol
(ICMP).
rip(8) – Route added or modified by Routing Information Protocol (RIP) (or
similar proprietary protocol).

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

IP Group – “ipRouteAge” Object (ipRouteEntry 10)
This object is implemented as a read-only object in the DSU/CSU. In the
DSU/CSU, it reflects the value of the route’s time-to-live (in seconds). When
displays, a value of 999 represents a route that is retained permanently. For
temporary routes, the ipRouteAge object decrements over time. All routes added
via an SNMP set of the ipRouteTable are considered permanent routes. These
routes do not age, but will remain unless deleted via SNMP.

ICMP Group, MIB II
The ICMP Group objects are fully supported by the DSU/CSU.

TCP Group, MIB II
The TCP Group objects are fully supported by the DSU/CSU, with the exception of
the tcpConnState object, which will be read-only.

UDP Group, MIB II
The User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Group objects are fully supported by the
DSU/CSU.

Transmission Group, MIB II
Objects in the transmission group are supported on the network and DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces, the COM port, the MODEM port, the AUX port,
and the synchronous data ports. The objects in the transmission group are not
defined within MIB II, but rather through other Internet standard MIB definitions.
The following two transmission group objects are supported by the DSU/CSU.

ds1 (transmission 18) – The transmission object supported on the T1
interfaces.
rs232 (transmission 33) – The transmission object supported on the
synchronous data ports, COM port, AUX port, and MODEM port.

The “ds1” transmission object is defined by the DS1/E1 MIB. The rs232
transmission object is defined by the RS-232-like MIB.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

E-13

E. SNMP MIB Objects

SNMP Group, MIB II
The SNMP Group objects that apply to a management agent are fully supported
by the DSU/CSU. The following objects apply only to an NMS and return a zero
value if accessed.

snmpInTooBigs (snmp 8)
snmpInNoSuchNames (snmp 9)
snmpInBadValues (snmp 10)
snmpInReadOnlys (snmp 11)
snmpInGenErrs (snmp 12)
snmpInGetResponses (snmp 18)
snmpInTraps (snmp19)
snmpOutGetRequests (snmp 25)
snmpOutGetNexts (snmp 26)
snmpOutSetRequests (snmp 27)

DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406)
The “ds1” object defined by RFC 1406 is supported for both the network and DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces. The DS1 Near End Group and DS1 Fractional
Group are supported for both interfaces. The DS1 Far End Group is not supported.

Near End Group, DS1/E1 MIB
The DS1 Near End Group consists of the following four tables:

DS1 Configuration
DS1 Current
DS1 Interval
DS1 Total

All four tables are fully supported for the network interface. Since statistics are not
kept for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, only the DS1 Configuration table is
fully supported. The “statistic” objects for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface
entry in the DS1 Current, DS1 Interval, and DS1 Total tables are always zero
(null). The following sections provide clarification for objects contained in the Near
End Group when it is not clear how the object definition in the DS1/E1 MIB is
related to the DSU/CSU.

E-14

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Near End Group – “dsx1TimeElapsed” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 3)
Applies to the network interface only. An error status is returned if access is
attempted for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Near End Group – “dsx1ValidIntervals” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 4)
Applies to the network interface only. An error status is returned if access is
attempted for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Near End Group – “dsx1LineType” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 5)
This object corresponds to the NET Framing/DTE Framing configuration options
for the T1 interfaces on the DSU/CSU. Only the following values are supported by
the DSU/CSU.

dsx1ESF(2) – Indicates ESF framing.
dsx1D4(2) – Indicates D4 framing.

Near End Group – “dsx1LineCoding” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 6)
This object corresponds to the NET Coding/DTE Coding configuration options for
the T1 interfaces on the DSU/CSU. Only the following values are supported by the
DSU/CSU.

dsx1B8ZS(2) – Indicates B8ZS line coding.
dsx1AMI(5) – Indicates AMI line coding.

Near End Group – “dsx1SendCode” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 7)
This object specifies the test patterns/codes being sent over the network interface.
These tests are not supported on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. Only the
following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.

3160-A2-GB21-90

dsx1SendNoCode(1) – Specifies that the interface is sending normal or
looped data. Setting the interface to this value stops an active “send pattern”
test on the interface. This is the only value supported by the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
dsx1SendLineCode(2) – Specifies that the network interface is sending a
Remote Loopback (Rlpbk) LLBUP code. The code is sent for 10 seconds.
dsx1SendResetCode(4) – Specifies that the network interface is sending
Remote Loopback (Rlpbk) LLBDN code. The code is sent for 10 seconds.
dsx1SendQRS(5) – Specifies that the network interface is sending a QRSS
test pattern. The pattern is sent until the test is halted (i.e., setting to
dsx1SendNoCode).
dsx1SendOtherTestPattern(8) – Specifies that the network interface is sending
a 1-in-8 test pattern. The pattern is sent until the test is halted (i.e., setting to
dsx1SendNoCode).

February 2001

E-15

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Near End Group – “dsx1CircuitIdentifier” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 8)
This object is only supported on the Net T1 Interface.
Near End Group – “dsx1LoopbackConfig” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 9)
This object specifies the loopback state of the T1 interfaces. Only the following
values are supported by the DSU/CSU.

dsx1NoLoop(1) – The T1 interface is not in a loopback state.
dsx1PayloadLoop(2) – Specifies that a Payload Loopback (PLB) is active for
the network interface or a Repeater Loopback (RLB) is active for the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
dsx1LineLoop(3) – Specifies that a Line Loopback (LLB) is active for the
network interface or a DTE Loopback (DLB) is active for the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.

Near End Group – “dsx1LineStatus” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 10)
This object specifies the line (alarm) status of the T1 interfaces. Only the following
values are supported by the DSU/CSU. More than one value may be active at a
time.

dsx1NoAlarm(1) – No alarm present.
dsx1RcvFarEndLOF(2) – A yellow alarm signal is being received.
dsx1RcvAIS(8) – An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is being received.
dsx1LossOfFrame(32) – An Out Of Frame condition has persisted for more
that 2.5 seconds (i.e., Red Alarm).
dsx1LossOfSignal(64) – A Loss of Signal condition has persisted for more that
2.5 seconds (i.e., Red Alarm).
dsx1LoopbackState(128) – The near end of the T1 interface is in a loopback
state.
dsx1Other Failure(4096) – An Excessive Error Rate (EER) has been detected
on the network interface.

Near End Group – “dsx1SignalMode” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 11)
This object specifies whether Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS) is being used. This
object differs from the MIB definition in that it is “read-only" (not read/write) for
DSU/CSUs. Only the following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.

E-16

none(1) – No signaling is being used on this interface.
robbedBit(2) – Robbed Bit Signaling is being used on at least one DS0 on this
T1 interface.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Near End Group – “dsx1TransmitClockSource” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 12)
This object specifies the timing source for the transmit clock for this T1 interface.
This object differs from the MIB definition in that it is “read-only” (not read/write) for
DSU/CSUs. Only the following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.

loopTiming(1) – The recovered receive clock is being used as the transmit
clock.
localTiming(2) – The DSU/CSU’s internal clock is used being as the transmit
clock.
ThroughTiming(3) – The recovered receive clock from another interface
(e.g., T1, Port, or External) is being used as the transmit clock.

Near End Group – “dsx1Fdl” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 13)
This object specifies how Facility Data Link is being used. Only the following
values are supported by the DSU/CSU. More than one value may be active at a
time.

dsx1other(1) – SNMP data is being sent over FDL.
dsx1Ansi-T1-403(2) – ANSI PRMs are supported on the network interface as
specified by ANSI T1.403.
dsx1Att-54016(4) – FDL supports the requirements specified by AT&T
publication TR54016.
dsx1Fdl-none(8) – Indicates that the device does not use FDL. This is the only
value that applies to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.

Near End Group – The DS1 Current Table Objects (dsx1CurrentEntry)
The following DS1 current table objects are provided for the network interface only.
Objects in the table that are not listed are not supported and will return an error
status if access is attempted.

3160-A2-GB21-90

dsx1CurrentIndex – The index that identifies the T1 interface.
dsx1CurrentESs – Errored Seconds for the current interval.
dsx1Current SESs – Severely Errored Seconds for the current interval.
dsx1CurrentUASs – Unavailable Seconds for the current interval.
dsx1CurrentCSSs – Controlled Slip Seconds for the current interval.
dsx1CurrentBESs – Bursty Errored Seconds for the current interval.

February 2001

E-17

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Near End Group – The DS1 Interval Table Objects (dsx1IntervalEntry)
The following DS1 interval table objects are provided for the network interface only.
Objects in the table that are not listed are not supported and will return an error
status if access is attempted.

dsx1IntervalIndex – The index that identifies the T1 interface.
dsx1IntervalNumber – The interval number (1 to 96).
dsx1IntervalESs – Errored Seconds for the interval.
dsx1Interval SESs – Severely Errored Seconds for the interval.
dsx1IntervalUASs – Unavailable Seconds for the interval.
dsx1IntervalCSSs – Controlled Slip Seconds for the interval.
dsx1Interval BESs – Bursty Errored Seconds for the interval.

Near End Group – The DS1 Total Table Objects (dsx1TotalEntry)
The following DS1 total table objects are provided for the network interface only.
Objects in the table that are not listed are not supported and will return an error
status if access is attempted.

dsx1TotalIndex – The index that identifies the T1 interface.
dsx1TotalESs – The 24-hour total Errored Seconds.
dsx1Total SESs – The 24-hour total Severely Errored Seconds.
dsx1TotalUASs – The 24-hour total Unavailable Seconds.
dsx1TotalCSSs – The 24-hour total Controlled Slip Seconds.
dsx1TotalBESs – The 24-hour total Bursty Errored Seconds.

Far End Group, DS1/E1 MIB
The DS1 Far End Group consists of the following three tables:

DS1 Far End Current
DS1 Far End Interval
DS1 Far End Total

These tables are not supported for either the network or DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface.

E-18

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

DS1 Fractional Group, DS1/E1 MIB
The DS1 Fractional Group consists of the DS1 fractional table. This table
(dsx1FracTable) is fully supported by the DSU/CSU and allows channel (time
slots) to be mapped between the T1 interfaces and data ports. If an invalid channel
map (e.g., two interfaces mapped to a single time slot, one interface mapped to
two T1s, etc.) is received, an error will be returned to the SNMP manager. The
DSU/CSU will validate all channel configurations before applying them.
Operational Note: The fractional T1 group only allows specification of an entire
interface to a particular time slot on another interface (i.e., a time slot on one
interface cannot be mapped to a time slot on another interface). This prevents
complete mapping of time slots on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to time
slots on the network interface. For mapping time slots between the network and
DTE T1 interfaces, the following convention is used: Time slots on the T1 interface
that are mapped to another T1 interface (i.e., not a data port) are connected in
ascending order. For example, if the fractional table for the network interface maps
time slots 1, 3 and 5 to the DTE T1 interface and the DTE T1 interface maps time
slots 10, 11 and 15 to the network the following time slots will be connected: N1 to
D10, N3 to D11 and N5 to D15.

RS-232-like MIB (RFC 1317)
The “rs232” object defined by RFC 1317 is supported for all of the synchronous
data ports, the MODEM port, the COM port, and the AUX port. The RS-232-like
MIB consists of one object and five tables, as follows:

Number of RS-232-like ports
The General Port Table
The Asynchronous Port Table
The Synchronous Port Table
The Input Signal Table
The Output Signal Table

The Asynchronous Port table is not supported by the DSU/CSU for the
synchronous data ports. The Input Signal and Output Signal tables are not
supported for the MODEM, AUX, and COM ports. The following sections provide
clarification for objects contained in the RS-232-like MIB when it is not clear how
the object definition in MIB is related to the DSU/CSU.
Number of Ports – “rs232Number” Object (rs232 1)
This object contains the number of ports in the RS-232-like general port table. This
number is 5 for the 3160, 7 for the 3164, 3 for the 3165 and 2 for the 3161.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

E-19

E. SNMP MIB Objects

General Port Table, RS-232-like MIB
The general port table contains general configuration objects for the RS-232-like
interfaces.
General Port Table – “rs232PortIndex” Object (rs232PortEntry 1)
This object contains a unique value for each port and is used as an index into the
general port table (rs232PortTable). The values of the rs232PortIndex object vary
between models and are listed below.
The values of rs232PortIndex for the 3160 DSU/CSU are:

1 – COM port
2 – Modem port
3 – Auxiliary RS-232 port
4 – DCE port 1
5 – DCE port 2

The values of rs232PortIndex for the carrier 3161 DSU/CSU are:

1 – DCE port 1
2 – DCE port 2 or COM port (depending upon configuration)

The values of rs232PortIndex for the 3164 DSU/CSU are:

1 – COM port
2 – Modem port
3 – Auxiliary RS-232 port
4 – DCE port 1
5 – DCE port 2
6 – DCE port 3
7 – DCE port 4

The values of rs232PortIndex for the 3165 DSU/CSU are:

E-20

1 – COM port
2 – Modem port
3 – DCE port 1

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

General Port Table – “rs232PortType” Object (rs232PortEntry 2)
This object is used to identify the port’s hardware type. Only the following values
are supported by the DSU/CSU.

rs232(2) – Used to identify the MODEM, AUX, and COM ports.
rs422(3) – Used to identify synchronous data ports that are configured as
EIA-530A or RS-449.
V35(5) – Used to identify synchronous data ports that are configured as V.35.

General Port Table – “rs232PortInSigNumber” Object (rs232PortEntry 3)
This object contains the number of input signals contained in the input signal table.
This is the number of signals that can be detected. This number is 2 for the
synchronous data ports and 0 for the MODEM, AUX, and COM ports.
General Port Table – “rs232PortOutSigNumber” Object (rs232PortEntry 4)
This object contains the number of output signals contained in the output signal
table. This is the number of signals that can be asserted. This number is 2 for the
synchronous data ports and 0 for the MODEM, AUX, and COM ports.
General Port Table – “rs232PortInSpeed” Object (rs232PortEntry 5)
This object contains the port’s input speed in bits per second. For the DSU/CSU,
the rs232PortInSpeed object has the same value as the rs232PortOutSpeed
object. The input speed of a synchronous data port is determined by the channel
configuration and cannot be changed through this object. Thus, for the
synchronous data ports, this object is read-only. The input speed of the MODEM,
AUX, or COM port is the currently configured speed. Setting of this value for the
MODEM, AUX, or COM port causes the configured port speed to be changed.
General Port Table – “rs232PortOutSpeed” Object (rs232PortEntry 6)
This object contains the port’s output speed in bits per second. For the DSU/CSU,
the rs232PortInSpeed object has the same value as the rs232PortOutSpeed
object. The input speed of a synchronous data port is determined by the channel
configuration and cannot be changed through this object. Thus, for the
synchronous data ports, this object is read-only. The input speed of the MODEM,
AUX, or COM port is the currently configured speed. Setting of this value for the
MODEM, AUX, or COM port causes the configured port speed to be changed.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

E-21

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Asynchronous Port Table, RS-232-like MIB
The asynchronous port table contains an entry for the MODEM, AUX, or COM port
when the port is configured for asynchronous operation. For the DSU/CSU, the
entries in the table that are counters (rs232AsyncPortEntry 6–8) are used to
collect statistics and are not supported.
Asynchronous Port Table, “rs232AsyncPortBits” (rs232AsyncPortEntry 2)
This object specifies the number of bits in a character. Only the following values
are supported by the DSU/CSU.

7 – 7-bit characters. Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only.
8 – 8-bit characters.

Asynchronous Port Table, “rs232AsyncPortStopBits”
(rs232AsyncPortEntry 3)
This object specifies the number of stop bits supported. Only the following values
are supported by the DSU/CSU.

one(1) – One stop bit.
two(2) – Two stop bits. Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only.
one-and-half(3) – One and a half stop bits. Supported on the COM port only.

Asynchronous Port Table, “rs232AsyncPortParity” (rs232AsyncPortEntry 4)
This object specifies the parity used by the port. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.

none(1) – No parity bit.
odd(2) – Odd parity. Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only.
even(3) – Even parity. Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only.

Asynchronous Port Table, “rs232AsyncPortAutoBaud”
(rs232AsyncPortEntry 5)
This object specifies the ability to automatically sense the input speed of the port.
Only the following value is supported by the DSU/CSU.

E-22

disabled(2) – Autobaud is not supported.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Synchronous Port Table, RS-232-like MIB
The synchronous port table contains an entry for each of the synchronous data
ports and the MODEM or COM port when the port is configured for synchronous
operation. For the DSU/CSU, the entries in the table that are counters
(rs232SyncPortEntry 3–7) are used to collect statistics and are not supported.
Synchronous Port Table – “rs232SyncPortClockSource”
(rs232SyncPortEntry 2)
This object specifies the clock source for the port. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.

internal(1) – The port uses an internal clock.
external(2) – The port uses an external clock.

Input Signal Table, RS-232-like MIB
This table contains entries for the input signals that can be detected by the unit for
each of the synchronous data ports.
Input Signal Table – “rs232InSigName” (rs232InSigEntry 2)
This object contains the identification of a hardware input signal. Only the following
values are supported by the DSU/CSU.

rts(1) – Request-To-Send.
dtr(4) – Data Terminal Ready.

Input Signal Table – “rs232InSigState” (rs232InSigEntry 3)
This object contains the current signal state. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.

on(2) – The signal is asserted.
off(3) – The signal is not asserted.

Input Signal Table – “rs232InSigChanges” (rs232InSigEntry 4)
This object is not supported by the DSU/CSU.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

E-23

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Output Signal Table, RS-232-like MIB
This object contains entries for the output signals that can be asserted by the unit
for each of the synchronous data ports.
Output Signal Table – “rs232OutSigName” (rs232OutSigEntry 2)
This object contains the identification of a hardware output signal. Only the
following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.

cts(1) – Clear-To-Send.
dsr(4) – Data Set Ready.

Output Signal Table – “rs232OutSigState” (rs232OutSigEntry 3)
This object contains the current signal state. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.

on(2) – The signal is asserted.
off(3) – The signal is not asserted.

Output Signal Table – “rs232OutSigChanges” (rs232OutSigEntry 4)
This object is not supported by the DSU/CSU.

Generic-Interface MIB Extensions (RFC 1229)
This generic-interface MIB is an experimental MIB that provides extensions to the
generic interface group defined in MIB II. This MIB describes three tables:

Generic Interface Extension Table
Generic Interface Test Table
Generic Receive Address Table

Only the generic interface test table is supported by the DSU/CSU. This table is
supported for the network interface only.

E-24

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Generic Interface Test Table, Generic Interface MIB
The test table provides access to additional tests (loopbacks and pattern tests)
that are not in the interface group of MIB II.
Generic Interface Test Table – “ifExtnsTestType” Object (ifExtnsTestEntry 4)
This object is a control variable used to start and stop operator-initiated tests on
the interface. It provides the capability to:

Start/stop the Monitor QRSS test pattern on the network interface.
Start/stop the Send QRSS/511 test pattern on a synchronous data port.
Start sending a V.54/FT1 UP/DOWN code to the remote unit for a
synchronous data port.
Start/stop the Monitor QRSS/511 test pattern on a synchronous data port.
Start/stop the DCLB/DTLB loopback test on a synchronous data port.

The following object identifiers are used to control the tests on the interface.

3160-A2-GB21-90

noTest – Stops the test in progress on the interface.
testFullDuplexLoopBack – Initiates a DCLB on the interface. Only supported
for the data ports.
testLoopDTLB – Initiates a DTLB on the interface. Only supported for the data
ports.
testMonQRSS – Initiates a Monitor QRSS test on the interface. Supported for
the data ports and the network interface.
testMon511 – Initiates a Monitor 511 test on the interface. Only supported for
the data ports.
testSendQRSS – Initiates a Send QRSS test on the interface. Only supported
for the data ports.
testSend511 – Initiates a send 511 test on the interface. Only supported for
the data ports.
testSendV54Up – Sends a V54 up code to the remote unit. Only supported for
the data ports.
testSendV54Down – Sends a V54 down code to the remote unit. Only
supported for the data ports.
testSendFT1Up – ends a FT1 up code to the remote unit. Only supported for
the data ports.
testSendFT1Down – Sends a FT1 down code to the remote unit. Only
supported for the data ports.

February 2001

E-25

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Where these object identifiers are defined as follows:

testLoopDTLB – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 2]
testMonQRSS – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 3]
testMon511 – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 4]
testSendQRSS – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 5]
testSend511 – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 6]
testSendV54Up – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 7]
testSendV54Down – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 8]
testSendFT1Up – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 9]
testSendFT1Down – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 10]

Generic Interface Test Table – “ifExtnsTestResult” Object
(ifExtnsTestEntry 5)
This object contains the result of the most recently requested test. Only the
following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.

none(1) – No test currently active.
inProgress(3) – A test is currently in progress.
notSupported(4) – The requested test is not supported.
unAbleToRun(5) – The requested test cannot run due to the state of the unit.

Generic Interface Test Table – “ifExtnsTestCode” Object
(ifExtnsTestEntry 6)
This object contains a code that contains more specific information on the test
result. This object is defined as an object identifier. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.

E-26

none – No further information is available. Used for the send pattern/code and
loopback tests.
inSyncNoBitErrors – A monitor pattern (QRSS or 511) test has synchronized
on the pattern and has not detected any bit errors.
inSyncWithBitErrors – A monitor pattern (QRSS or 511) test has synchronized
on the pattern and has detected bit errors.
notInSync – A monitor pattern (QRSS or 511) test has not synchronized on
the requested pattern.

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Where these object identifiers are defined as follows:

wellKnownCodes – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [ifExtensions 5]
none – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownCodes 1]
inSyncNoBitErrors – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownCodes 2]
inSyncWithBitErrors – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownCodes 3]
notInSync – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownCodes 4]

Enterprise MIB
The variable devConfigAreaCopy under the devConfigAreaCopy group in the
common area of the Enterprise MIB will be fully supported. This variable allows
the entire contents of one configuration area to be copied into another
configuration area.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

E-27

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Correlation between Menu Commands and SNMP Objects
Table E-1, SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross-Reference, provides a
correlation between how a function is performed or status is displayed on the front
panel and how the same function is accomplished using access to the SNMP
database. SNMP objects are displayed in bold type while values for SNMP
objects are displayed in italics.
DSU ESF

Test

Stat
DevHS STest Perf TStat LED
Telco

User

Prtn
Near

Ctrl

Cnfig

Rel

Call

T1 Prtn
Rlpbk

Far

LED

ACO
▲

Lpbk

Ptrns

Abort

Send

Pass Dial Disc ChDir
●

Mon

1 . . 5,A
(Directory)

QRSS 511
LLBUP LLBDN 54UP 54DN FT1UP FT1DN

ClrReg

CID

Mon

DL
EQPT NET

Lamp

Cur 24Tot Intvl
Cur 8Tot Intvl

Reset Passwd

QRSS 1in8 511

User Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4

Near

Far

DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4

Abort LLB PLB DLB RLB DCLB DTLB
Load Edit Area From:
Activ

Cust1 Cust2 Fact1

Fact2

Choose Function:
Save

Edit

Activ Cust1 Cust2
DTE

Copy

Prt1

Port

Prt2

Prt3

NET

Chan

Gen

User

Prt4

Alarm

Mgmt

Gen Trap

Port Select :

All

Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4

Dsply Clear DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4

▲ For Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs only
● For Standalone DSU/CSUs only
For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs only

E-28

496-14945

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Table E-1.

SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross-Reference (1 of 3)

Front Panel Command

SNMP MIB Object

Stat–>DevHS:
LOS at NET
OOF at NET
Yellow at NET
AIS at NET
EER at NET

Read the dsx1LineStatus object for NET T1

Stat–>DevHS:
LOS at DTE
OOF at DTE
Yellow at DTE
AIS at DTE

Read the dsx1LineStatus object for DTE T1

Stat–>Perf –>Telco–>Cur:
CurTimer
ES
UAS
SES
BES
CSS

Read the value in the following objects for NET T1
dsx1TimeElapsed
dsx1CurrentES
dsx1CurrentUAS
dsx1CurrentSES
dsx1CurrentBES
dsx1CurrentCSS

Stat–>Perf–>Telco–>Intvl–>Dsply:

Select the interval number with dsx1IntervalNumber. Read the
value in the following objects for NET T1
dsx1IntervalES
dsx1IntervalUAS
dsx1IntervalSES
dsx1IntervalBES
dsx1IntervalCSS
dsx1ValidIntervals

ES
UAS
SES
BES
CSS
VldIntvl
Stat–>Perf–>Telco–>24Tot:
VldIntvl
ES
UAS
SES
BES
CSS
Stat–>Tstat:
LLB Test Active
PLB Test Active
RLB Test Active
DLB Test Active
DCLB on Port n
DTLB on Port n
1-8 Test Active
QRSS Test Active
QRSS on Port n
511 on Port n
Monitoring QRSS
Mon QRSS, Port n
Mon511, Port n

3160-A2-GB21-90

dsx1LossOfSignal
dsx1LossOfFrame
dsx1RcvFarEnd
dsx1RcvAIS
dsx1OtherFailure

dsx1LossOfSignal
dsx1LossOfFrame
dsx1RcvFarEnd
dsx1RcvAIS

Read the value in the following objects for NET T1
dsx1ValidIntervals
dsx1TotalES
dsx1TotalUAS
dsx1TotalSES
dsx1TotalBES
dsx1TotalCSS
Read:

dsx1LineLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1
dsx1PayloadLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1
dsx1PayloadLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1
dsx1LineLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1
testFullDuplexLoopback from IfExtnsTestType for Port n
testLoopDTLB from IfExtnsTestType for Port n
dsx1SendOtherTestPattern from dsx1SendCode for Net T1
dsx1SendQRS from dsx1SendCode for Net T1
testSendQRSS from IfExtnsTestType for Port n
testSend511 from IfExtnsTestType for Port n
testMonQRSS from ifExtnsTestType for Net T1
testMonQRSS from ifExtnsTestType for Port n
testMon511 from ifExtnsTestType for Port n

February 2001

E-29

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Table E-1.

SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross-Reference (2 of 3)

Front Panel Command

SNMP MIB Object

Stat–>LED–>Prtn:

Read:

DTR
CTS
RTS

rs232InSigState from rs232InSigName == dtr
rs232outSigState from rs232OutSigName == ctr
rs232InSigState from rs232InSigName == rts

Stat–>ID:
Ser
Mod
SRev
HRevCCA1
HRevCCA2

Read the sysDescr object from the System Group

Test–>Rlpbk–>LLBUP

Set dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendLineCode

Test–>Rlpbk–>LLBDN

Set dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendResetCode

Test–>Rlpbk–>54UP–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendV54Up

Test–>Rlpbk–>54DN–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendV54Down

Test–>Rlpbk–>FT1UP–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendFT1UP

Test–>Rlpbk–>FT1DN–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendFT1Down

Test–>Lpbk–>LLB

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1LineLoop

Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>LLB

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1NoLoop

Test–>Lpbk–>PLB

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1PayloadLoop

Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>PLB

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1NoLoop

Test–>Lpbk–>DLB

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1LineLoop

Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>DLB

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1NoLoop

Test–>Lpbk–>RLB

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1PayloadLoop

Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>RLB

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1NoLoop

Test–>Lpbk–>DCLB–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testFullDuplexLoopBack

Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>Lpbk–>Prtn

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for port n to noTest

Test–>Lpbk–>DTLB–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testLoopDTLB

Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>DTLB–>Prtn

Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for port n to noTest

Test–>Prtns–>Send–>QRSS–>NET

Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendQRSS

Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Send–>NET

Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendNoCode

Test–>Prtns–>Send–>QRSS–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendQRS

Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Send–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to noTest

Test–>Prtns–>Send–>1in8

Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendOtherTestPattern

Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Send–>NET

Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendNoCode

Test–>Prtns–>Send–>511–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSend511

Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Send–>Prtn

Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to noTest

E-30

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

E. SNMP MIB Objects

Table E-1.

SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross-Reference (3 of 3)

Front Panel Command

SNMP MIB Object

Test–>Prtns–>Mon–>QRSS–>NET

Set ifExtnsTestType for Net T1 to testMonQRSS

Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Mon–>NET

Set ifExtnsTestType for Net T1 to noTest

Test–>Prtns–>Mon–>QRSS–>Prtn

Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to testMonQRSS

Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Mon–>Prtn

Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to noTest

Test–>Prtns–>Mon–>511–>Prtn

Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to testMon511

Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Mon–>Prtn

Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to noTest

Cnfig–>Load

Set devConfigAreaCopy to the desired choice (Active to
Customer1, etc.)

Cnfig–>Save

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>DTE–>DTE–>Framing

Set/Display dsx1LineType for DTE T1 to dsx1ESF or dsx1D4

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>DTE–>DTE–>Coding

Set/Display dsx1LineCoding for DTE T1 to dsx1B8ZS or
dsx1AMI

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Port–>Prtn–>Port Type

Display rs232PortType for port n to rs422 or v35

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Port–>Prtn–>TxClock

Set/Display rs232SyncPortClockSource for port n to internal or
external

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>NET–>NET–>Framing

Set/Display dsx1LineType for NET T1 to dsx1ESF or dsx1D4

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>NET–>NET–>Coding

Set/Display dsx1LineCoding for NET T1 to dsx1B8ZS or
dsx1AMI

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>NET–>ANSI PRM

Set/Display dsx1Fdl for NET T1 to dsx1Ansi-T1-403 or
dsx1Att-54016 or dsx1other

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>NET–>Mgmt Link
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>DTE–>Assign

Set/Display dsx1FracNumber and dsx1FracIfindex for DTE T1

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>DTE–>Voice

Display dsx1SignalMode for DTE T1 to none or robbedBit

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>Prtn–>Assign To

Set/Display dsx1FracNumber and dsx1Fracifindex for DTE or
Net T1

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>Display
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>Prtn–>Port Rate

Display rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed for port n

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Gen–>Clock Src

Display dsx1TransmitClockSource for DTE T1 or NET T1

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>Com Rate

Set/Display rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed for COM,
AUX, or MODEM port

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>Aux Rate
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>Modem Rate
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>Char Length

Set/Display rs232AyncPortBits for COM or MODEM port

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>MChar Len
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>CParity

Set/Display rs232AyncPortParity for COM or MODEM port

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>MParity
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>CStop Bits

Set/Display rs232AyncPortStopBits for COM or MODEM port

Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>MStop Bits

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

E-31

E. SNMP MIB Objects

E-32

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

IP Network Addressing Scenarios

F
Overview
This appendix describes a means of configuring 31xx Series devices in an Internet
Protocol (IP) network to provide SNMP or Telnet connectivity. Since there are
many possible network addressing schemes, this appendix describes an
addressing scheme for typical customer network management system (NMS)
scenarios. This appendix is not intended to be an IP addressing or routing tutorial,
and a basic understanding of IP and 31xx Series devices is assumed.
The following notes apply to these scenarios:

3160-A2-GB21-90

Connections to remote devices may be via EDL (for 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs) or FDL; however, the FDL is only available on full T1 links (not
fractional T1s). Check with the service provider to be sure that the FDL is
end-to-end (i.e., not terminated at an intermediate point within the network).
Interconnected 31xx Series devices automatically pass routing information
between them; however, a static route to the subnet(s) must be set in the
routing table of the NMS host. This route uses the 31xx Series device
connected to the LAN (via the LAN Adapter), or the NMS (via a direct PPP or
SLIP connection) as a gateway to the subnet(s). In all instances, the
addressing scheme presented works for both the LAN and the direct
connections.
Although routing table entries are maintained automatically by 31xx Series
devices, without the need for user configuration, only a maximum of 100
routes is supported for a given device.
The choice of a host address within a given subnet is completely arbitrary.
Choose any legal host address for a given subnet, without regard to the local
or remote devices.
Although the default route (to the NMS) is configurable for all devices, only
devices that have a direct external connection to an NMS (via the COM or
AUX ports) need a default route set. In the following examples, the default port
(COM or AUX) is set in the device connected to the LAN Adapter.

February 2001

F-1

F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios

Scenario 1
The first scenario (Figure F-1, Daisy-Chained Standalone at the Central Site) is a
series of standalone 31xx Series devices daisy chained together, with remotes
connected via the FDL. In this scenario, all 31xx Series devices are on the same
subnet (135.18.1.0). The subnet mask for each device is FF.FF.FF.00. A static
route is set in the NMS host to subnet 135.18.1.0.

ETHERNET
135.18.40.1

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

135.18.1.2
135.18.1.3

NETWORK

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

LAN
ADAPTER

SUBNET 135.18.40.0
AUX/COM IP ADDRESS: 135.18.40.2

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

135.18.1.4
135.18.1.5

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

SUBNET 135.18.1.0
01

135.18.1.1

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

135.18.1.7

Figure F-1.

F-2

135.18.1.6

496-14645-03

Daisy-Chained Standalone at the Central Site

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios

Scenario 2
The second scenario (Figure F-2, Local Carrier with Remote Standalone) is a
carrier communicating with standalone remotes. This scenario is similar to the
previous one, treating the carrier devices as the daisy-chained devices. All devices
are still on the same subnet, and the subnet mask is FF.FF.FF.00. A static route still
must be set in the NMS host to subnet 135.18.2.0.

ETHERNET
135.18.40.1

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

135.18.2.17

NETWORK

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

LAN
ADAPTER

135.18.2.18

SUBNET 135.18.40.0

COM IP ADDRESS: 135.18.40.3
FT1
SUBNET 135.18.2.0

T1
CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

135.18.2.26
135.18.2.1
135.18.2.16

CO
MSP
HE
RE
30
00

496-14646-02

Figure F-2.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Local Carrier with Remote Standalone

February 2001

F-3

F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios

Scenario 3
This third scenario (Figure F-3, Local Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers)
shows a local carrier connected to remote carriers that have remote standalones.
Each carrier must be on a separate subnet but, as in the previous scenario, the
carrier-remote combination can share a common subnet. Once again, the subnet
mask is FF.FF.FF.00 for all devices. A static route must be set up in the NMS host
for each subnet: 135.18.4.0, 135.18.6.0, 135.18.20.0.
135.18.6.22

135.18.20.23
T1

T1
CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

T1
CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

135.18.6.34

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

135.18.20.45

5.1

8.6

SUBNET 135.18.6.0

5.1

8.2

0.1

5.1

CO
MSP
HE
RE
30
00

8.6

SUBNET 135.18.20.0

.16

5.1

CO
MSP
HE
RE
30
00

8.2

0.1

T1
ETHERNET
T1

LAN
ADAPTER

COM IP
ADDRESS:
135.18.40.4

135.18.40.1

5.1

8.4

SUBNET 135.18.40.0

CO
MSP
HE
RE
30
00

5.1

SUBNET 135.18.4.0

Figure F-3.

F-4

8.4

.16

Local Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios

Scenario 4
An alternative addressing scheme, for the network is shown in Figure F-4, Local
Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers – an Alternative. This example uses a
subnet mask of FF.FF.00.00 for the COM port in the central-site carrier (only), with
all of the remaining subnet masks set to FF.FF.FF.00. The advantage to this
scheme is that only one route must be added to the NMS host (135.18.0.0).

135.19.6.22

135.19.20.23
T1

T1
CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

T1
CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

135.19.6.34

135.19.20.45

5.1

9.6

5.1

9.2

0.1

5.1

30
00

9.6

5.1

CO
MSP
HE
RE

CO
MSP
HE
RE
30
00

9.2

.16

0.1

T1
ETHERNET
T1

LAN
ADAPTER

COM IP
ADDRESS:
135.18.40.4
COM
SUBNET MASK:
FF:FF:00:00

135.18.40.1

5.1

9.1

SUBNET 135.18.40.0
SUBNET 135.19.0.0

CO
MSP
HE
RE
30
00

5.1

9.1

.16
496-14648-02

Figure F-4.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Local Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers – an Alternative

February 2001

F-5

F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios

Scenario 5
Figure F-5, Multiple COM Ports Connected to Different NMSs, illustrates multiple
COM ports on the same carrier connected to different NMSs. This might be used
in service-provider applications, where some of the carrier's circuit cards (and their
remotes) are managed by one NMS and other cards are managed by a different
NMS. In this example, each card and remote is on a separate subnet. Also, note
that each LAN Adapter connection is on a different subnet. The subnet mask is
FF.FF.FF.00. The NMS hosts would only need routes added for the subnets that
they are to manage.
SUBNET 135.18.23.0

SUBNET 135.18.34.0

CO
MS
PH
ER
E 361
0

135.18.23.2

135.18.34.2

COM IP
ADDRESS:
135.140.22.95

COM IP
ADDRESS:
135.18.40.5

5.1

LAN
ADAPTER

8.2

2.1

CO
MSP
HE
RE

30
00

5.1

8.3

7.1

ETHERNET

135.140.22.79

ETHERNET

SUBNET 135.140.22.0

135.18.40.1

SUBNET 135.18.40.0

496-14649-02

Figure F-5.

F-6

Multiple COM Ports Connected to Different NMSs

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Front Panel Emulation

G
Overview
The DSU/CSU offers functionality through Front Panel Emulation software that is
similar to that provided by the DSU/CSU front panel. The DSU/CSU can either be
locally or remotely attached to a 386 or higher PC that has at least 4 MB of RAM.
A copy of the DSU/CSU front panel appears on the PC. The functionality of the
front panel is available by clicking on the Function keys with the mouse rather than
by pressing keys from the actual front panel.
For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, a single PC is used to access all of the slots in
the carrier. The PC is connected locally to a single slot containing either a 3151
CSU or 3161 DSU/CSU that has been configured to enable a shared COM port on
the Auxiliary Backplane. The attached PC can access any 3151/3161 device
attached to the Auxiliary Backplane. For more information about using the COM
port on the carrier, refer to the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General
Information Guide.

Installing Front Panel Emulation Software
The Front Panel Emulation software is supplied on a 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB,
double-sided, high-density, write-protected diskette, with 15 sectors per track,
80 tracks per side, and 96 tracks per inch.
This software must be installed on a 386 or higher PC with Microsoft Windows
Release 3.1 or higher, MS-DOS 3.3 or higher, and at least 4 MB of RAM. A VGA
color monitor with VGA adapter (or higher resolution) is required. A mouse is also
required. The following procedures must be performed in the Windows
environment.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

G-1

G. Front Panel Emulation

Procedure
To install Front Panel Emulation software:
1. Insert the diskette into the appropriate drive.
2. Select File from Program Manager.
3. Choose Run.
4. Type A:INSTALL and click OK.

5. An Information screen appears. Choose Continue to continue the installation.
6. Type the letter of the destination drive, followed by a colon (default is C:), then
the appropriate directory name (default is C:\FRONTPAN).
If the selected directory already exists, the following message appears: The
specified directory already exists. Do you want to
overwrite the directory?
If the selected directory is new, the following message appears: The
specified directory does not exist. Do you want to create
the directory?
7. Select Yes. A confirmation screen appears. Select Install to continue the
installation.
8. A Setup Completed screen appears. Select Continue. The Program Manager
screen appears with the Front Panel icon.

G-2

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

G. Front Panel Emulation

Starting Front Panel Emulation
If the DSU/CSU selected is not locally attached to the PC, you must first dial to the
remote DSU/CSU before starting front panel emulation. The modem attached to
the PC must support AT commands for the Front Panel Emulation software to
successfully place the call.

Procedure
To start front panel emulation:
1. From the PC, open Program Manager from Windows.
2. Double click on the Front Panel icon that appears after the Front Panel
Emulation program is installed on the PC. The Front Panel window opens.

3. Double click on the Front Panel icon that appears in the Front Panel window.
The Front Panel Emulation screen appears.
4. Enter the Com Port and Speed from the drop-down selection list boxes.

The Com Port field needs to contain the actual communications port name as
recorded in the Windows information file (INI).
The Speed field needs to contain one of the following communications
speeds: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, or 38400 and should match
the DSU/CSU’s COM port configuration.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

G-3

G. Front Panel Emulation

5. Choose either a Local (for near-end DSU/CSU) or Remote (for far-end
DSU/CSU) destination.
6. If you chose a Local destination, click on the Execute button. If you chose a
Remote destination, enter the telephone number of the far-end DSU/CSU in
the Phone Number field, then click on the Dial button.
7. The front panel of the selected DSU/CSU appears on the PC.

NOTE:
When using Front Panel Emulation, no LEDs are shown on the PC’s
screen; you must use the Stat command procedure to get LED information
(see Displaying LED Conditions in Chapter 3, Operation).

G-4

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Asynchronous Terminal Operation

H
Overview
You can configure and manage the DSU/CSU from an asynchronous (async)
terminal that is configured for 9.6 kbps, 8 characters, no parity, and 1 stop bit.
This appendix provides operational examples to help you become familiar with the
use of the async terminal for DSU/CSU control.
By convention throughout this appendix, examples of screens are shown as they
appear with the standalone 4-port DSU/CSU.

Before Using the Asynchronous Terminal
You can connect the async terminal directly to the COM port of the DSU/CSU, or
you can establish a remote connection using dial-in (via the integral modem) or
Telnet access.
Before using the async terminal, you may use the DSU/CSU’s front panel to set
certain configuration options for async terminal operation. Use the Configuration
(Cnfig) branch of the front panel menu and edit the User Interface (User)
configuration options for async terminal operation. Refer to Changing
Configuration Options in Chapter 3, Operation, and Appendix C, Configuration
Options.
To connect the async terminal to the DSU/CSU using Telnet access, refer to
Configuring the DSU/CSU for SNMP or Telnet Access in Chapter 3, Operation.
If the DSU/CSU is misconfigured, leaving it in a state that does not support async
terminal operation, the recovery procedure consists of power cycling the
DSU/CSU, waiting for the completion of the power-up self-test, and then pressing
the async terminal’s Return key five times in succession. (Begin pressing the
Return key within two seconds after the completion of power-up self-test, and do
not wait longer than one second between each successive key press.) This
procedure allows you to use the System Paused screen to reset the COM port
configuration options or to reload all factory default configuration options.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

H-1

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Initiating an Asynchronous Terminal Session
Once the appropriate configuration option changes have been made and access is
established, the Main Menu screen appears (unless a password is required).
Figure H-1, Main Menu Screen, shows the Main Menu screen for a standalone
DSU/CSU.
The carrier-mounted DSU/CSU shows the 3000 Series carrier slot number under
the Customer ID. The slot number field (e.g., Slot: 1) is changed to access specific
DSU/CSUs in the carrier. For Telnet or SNMP access to the carrier, specify the IP
address of the applicable communication port (see Appendix F, IP Network
Addressing Scenarios).

NOTE:
By convention throughout this appendix, examples of screens are shown as
they appear with the standalone DSU/CSU.
If a password is required, the Login screen displays the prompt for password input.
(Refer to Entering a Password to Gain Access on page H-14.)
To move between the Screen area and the Screen Function Keys area
(Figure H-1, Main Menu Screen), press Ctrl-a (Control key and a).
From the Screen area, you may select the Status, Test, Configuration, or
Control branches.

H-2

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Ending an Asynchronous Terminal Session
To end the async terminal session from any screen, press Ctrl-a to move from the
Screen area to the Screen Function Keys area (Figure H-1, Main Menu Screen),
and then select Exit.

main
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx

Model: 31xx

MAIN MENU

Status
Test
Configuration
Control

Screen Area

Screen
Function
Keys Area

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ctrl-a to access these functions
Exit

Figure H-1.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Main Menu Screen

February 2001

H-3

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Menu Organization
Async terminal menus differ from front panel menus in that they typically do not
use abbreviations and, in some cases, provide a more direct access to an option
or function.
Figure H-2, Menu Organization, shows the organization of the async terminal
menu tree.
Main

Status

Test

Cross Connect
Display
Status
LEDs
Performance
System and
Statistics
Test Status
DTE Channel
Display
Network
Channel
Display

Configuration

Call
Start
Select
Administer
Directories Password
Download
LEDs
Call
Reset
Customer ID System
Select
Setup
Device
Monitor
Alarm
Jack
Relay
Cut-Off

Identity

Network &
DTE Tests

Device
Tests
Sync Data
Abort
Port Tests
Tests

Port
Assignment
Display

Configuration
Edit/Display

Sync Data
Port
Network
Clear
Statistics

Network

Control

DTE

Sync Data
Ports

Copy
Ports

Cross
Connect

General
Options

User
Interface

Alarms Management
& Traps
and
Communication

DTE to
Sync Data
Clear
Network
Port
Assignments
Assignments Assignments

Front Communication External
Port
Panel
Device

Telnet
Sessions

Auxiliary
Port

Internal
Modem

Communication General SNMP
Protocol
Management

SNMP NMS
Security

SNMP
Traps
496-14997

Figure H-2.

H-4

Menu Organization

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Using Asynchronous Terminal Screens

There are three types of async terminal screens.
Menu screens list selections available through the menu system.
Input screens allow you to edit or change information on a screen using
screen function keys (Table H-1, Screen Function Keys) or keyboard keys
(Table H-2, Keyboard Keys).
Display screens show the results from a data collection operation or they
display device-specific information.

The async terminal supports character matching for entering values in fields. For
example, if the values for a field can be DTE, NET, or PORT and you enter a D and
press Return (Enter), then the field automatically populates with the value DTE.
Once an operation is initiated, status messages appear in the last row of the
screen. These include Please Wait (when a command takes longer than five
seconds) and Command Complete.
Table H-1. Screen Function Keys

3160-A2-GB21-90

Screen Function Key

Usage

M (MainMenu)

Returns to the Main Menu screen.

E (Exit)

Terminates the async terminal session.

R (Refresh)

Updates the screen with the current information.

U (PgUp)

Pages up to the previously displayed page of information.

D (PgDn)

Pages down to the previously displayed page of
information.

S (Save)

Stores changes in nonvolatile memory.

February 2001

H-5

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Table H-2. Keyboard Keys
Keyboard Key

Usage

Ctrl-a

Moves the cursor between the Screen area and the Screen
Function Keys area.

Esc

Returns to the previous screen.

Tab

Moves the cursor to the next field.

Back (Shift) Tab or Ctrl-k

Moves the cursor to the previous field.

Backspace

Moves the cursor one position to the left or to the last
character of the previous field.

Spacebar

Selects the next valid value for the field.

Delete

Deletes the character that the cursor is on.

Up Arrow key or Ctrl-u

Moves the cursor up one field within a column on the same
screen.

Down Arrow key or Ctrl-d

Moves the cursor down one field within a column on the
same screen.

Right Arrow key or Ctrl-f

Moves the cursor back one character to the right.

Left Arrow key or Ctrl-b

Moves the cursor back one character to the left.

Ctrl-l

Redraws the screen display.

Return (Enter)

Accepts entry.

NOTES:
— Some Telnet applications may require the use of Ctrl-u, Ctrl-d, Ctrl-f, and
Ctrl-b as an alternative to the use of the Up, Down, Right, and Left Arrow
keys.
— The following procedures are examples only. This appendix uses
examples to help you become familiar with the use of the async terminal
for DSU/CSU control.

H-6

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Setting Customer Identification
The customer identification is used to uniquely identify the DSU/CSU.

Procedure
To change the customer identification (Customer ID):
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Control.
The Control screen appears.
2. From the Control screen, select Customer ID.
The Customer ID screen appears (Figure H-3, Customer Identification
Screen).
3. Use the Customer ID field to set the customer identification.
The customer identification may be up to 8 characters long.
Select Clear to remove all the characters in the associated field.
4. Select Save to store the information in nonvolatile memory.
In addition to the customer identification, you may also enter a system name,
system location, and system contact. Although only 40 characters are displayed
for these fields, you may enter up to 255 characters. The fields scroll as the
additional characters are added.

Customer
Identification
Field

main/control/customer id
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx

Model: 31xx

CUSTOMER ID

Customer ID:
System Name:
System Location:
System Contact:

Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Exit
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Save

Figure H-3.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Customer Identification Screen

February 2001

H-7

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Displaying LED Conditions
The same conditions monitored by the front panel LEDs can also be monitored by
the Display LEDs screen. This screen is most useful when the DSU/CSU is being
accessed remotely.

Procedure
To display LED conditions:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Status.
The Status screen appears.
2. From the Status screen, select Display LEDs.
The Display LEDs screen appears (Figure H-4, Example of Display LEDs
Screen).
The screen shows a snapshot of the LEDs every 5 seconds. LEDs that are
illuminated are displayed by inverse video.
Select Refresh to update the screen.

main/status/leds
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx

Model: 31xx

DISPLAY LEDs
GENERAL

NETWORK

DTE

PORT 1

PORT 2

PORT 3

PORT 4

OK
Fail
Test

Sig
OOF
Alm
EER

Sig
OOF
Alm
PDV
BPV

DTR
TXD
RXD
CTS
RTS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Exit
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Refresh

Figure H-4.

H-8

Example of Display LEDs Screen

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Changing Configuration Options
Use the Configuration branch of the main menu to display or change DSU/CSU
configuration options. Refer to Changing Configuration Options in Chapter 3,
Operation, and Appendix C, Configuration Options.
If the access level is not Level 1, the message Access level is 2,
Configuration is read-only is displayed on line 24.

Displaying or Editing Configuration Options
Procedure
To display or edit configuration options:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Configuration.
The Load Configuration From screen appears (Figure H-5, Configuration Load
Screen).

main/config
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx

Model: 31xx

LOAD CONFIGURATION FROM:
Current Configuration
Customer Configuration 1
Customer Configuration 2
Default Factory Configuration 1
Default Factory Configuration 2

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit

Figure H-5.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Configuration Load Screen

February 2001

H-9

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

2. From the Load Configuration From screen, select a configuration option set to
load (Current, Customer 1, Customer 2, Default Factory 1, or Default
Factory 2). You cannot edit the Default Factory configuration options, but you
can display them.
After selecting the set of configuration options to load, the Configuration
Edit/Display screen appears (Figure H-6, Configuration Edit/Display Screen).

main/config/edit
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx

Model: 31xx

CONFIGURATION EDIT/DISPLAY
Network
DTE
Sync Data Ports
Copy Ports
Cross Connect
General Options
User Interface
Alarms & Traps
Management and Communication

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
Save

Figure H-6.

Configuration Edit/Display Screen

3. Select a functional group to display or edit.

NOTE:
Screen displays may vary depending on the model and configuration of the
DSU/CSU. For example, DTE and Copy Ports are not displayed for the
single-port DSU/CSU.

H-10

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Saving Edit Changes
Procedure
To save edit changes:
1. From the last edit screen, select Save.
The Save Configuration To screen appears (Figure H-7, Configuration Save
Screen).
2. From the Save Configuration To screen, select a configuration option set
(Current, Customer 1, or Customer 2).
Save edit changes to the Current area when you want those changes to take effect
immediately. Save edit changes to the Customer area when you want to overwrite
the existing Customer configuration options and store these changes for future
use.
To protect you from accidentally exiting an edit session before saving your
changes, the system displays the Save Changes? prompt if you select either
MainMenu or Exit from an edit screen. If you respond No, the system exits without
saving the changes. If you respond Yes, you are prompted to specify where the
changes should be saved.

main/config/save
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx

Model: 31xx

SAVE CONFIGURATION TO:
Current Configuration
Customer Configuration 1
Customer Configuration 2

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Exit
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu

Figure H-7.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Configuration Save Screen

February 2001

H-11

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Establishing Access Security on a Port
Although the password feature is available, it is not required. If used, it ensures
access security before control is passed to a device connected to a port. The
following procedure is an example only. It shows how to enable the password for
the communication port. Passwords can also be enabled for the internal modem
and for Telnet sessions.

Procedure
To establish access security on the communication port:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Configuration.
The Load Configuration From screen appears.
2. From the Load Configuration From screen, select Current.
The Configuration Edit/Display screen appears.
3. From the Configuration Edit/Display screen, select User Interface.
The User Interface Options screen appears.
4. From the User Interface Options screen, select Communication Port.
The Communication Port Options screen appears.
5. In the Password Required field, enter Enable (Figure H-8, Enabling a
Password).
6. Select Save to store this setting in nonvolatile memory.
The Save Configuration To screen appears.
7. From the Save Configuration To screen, select Current.
The password itself is set separately. Refer to the following section, Setting a
Password on page H-13.
main/config/user/com
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx

Model: 31xx

COMMUNICATION PORT OPTIONS
Port Use:
Port Type:
Data Rate (Kbps):
Character Length:
Parity:
Stop Bits:
Ignore Control Leads:

Terminal
Asynchronous
9.6
8
None
1
Disable

Password Required:
Inactivity Timeout:
Disconnect Time (Minutes):

Enable
Enable
5

Enable
Password

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
Save

Figure H-8.

H-12

Enabling a Password

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Setting a Password
In addition to establishing access security on a port (refer to the previous section,
Establishing Access Security on a Port on page H-12), the password itself is set.
Unless you specify otherwise, the password is null.

Procedure
To set a password:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Control.
The Control screen appears.
2. From the Control screen, select Administer Password.
The Password Entry screen appears (Figure H-9, Setting a Password).
This screen is used to add a new password or modify an existing password.
3. Enter a new password in the Password field.
The password may be 1 to 8 characters long and may contain the characters 0
through 9, a through z, and/or A through Z.
4. Use the Re-Enter Password field to verify the new password.
5. Select Save.
Once a password is saved, the Login Records Saved message appears at the
bottom of the screen.

main/control/admin_password
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx

Model: 31xx

PASSWORD ENTRY

Enter New
Password

Password:
Re-Enter Password:

Re-enter
Password

Save
Password
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
Save

Figure H-9.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Setting a Password

February 2001

H-13

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Entering a Password to Gain Access
When access security is required, the Login screen (Figure H-10, Entering a
Password) appears before you can access the Main Menu screen. The password
must be entered.

If the password is valid, the DSU/CSU’s top-level menu appears.
If the password is invalid, an invalid password message appears and the
screen reappears and waits for password entry.
If an invalid password is entered three consecutive times, the message User
Interface Idle appears, Telnet sessions are closed, dial-in connections
are disconnected, and an SNMP trap is generated.

Model: 31xx

Enter
Password

Enter Password

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ctrl-a to access these functions
Exit

Figure H-10. Entering a Password

H-14

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

Configuration Worksheets for the Asynchronous Terminal Interface
This section contains one set of blank worksheets to be used when configuring
your DSU/CSU using the async terminal interface. In the tables, default settings
for Default Factory 1 are indicated by bold type. It is recommended that you copy
these blank worksheets before using them.

3160-A2-GB21-90

Network Interface
Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Line Framing Format

NET Framing

D4, ESF

Line Coding Format

NET Coding

AMI, B8ZS

Line Build Out (LBO)

LBO

0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5

Management Link

Mgmt Link

Enable, Disable

Bit Stuffing

BitStuff

62411, Part68, Disable

Network Initiated LLB

NET LLB

Enable, Disable

Network Initiated PLB

NET PLB

Enable, Disable

ANSI Performance Report
Messages

ANSI PRM

Enable, Disable

Circuit Identifier

Circuit Ident

Text Field, Clear

DTE Interface Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Interface Status

DTE Port

Enable, Disable

Line Framing Format

DTE Framing

D4, ESF

Line Coding Format

DTE Coding

AMI, B8ZS

Line Equalization

Equal

0–133, 133–266, 266–399,
399–533, 533–655

DTE LB on External
Contact

Extrn DLB

Enable, Disable

Send All Ones on DTE
Failure

Send Ones

Enable, Disable

February 2001

H-15

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

H-16

Sync Data Port Options
(Port 1)

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Type

E530, V.35, RS449, X.21

Port Base Rate

Base Rate

Nx64, Nx56

Transmit Clock Source

Tx Clock

Internal, External

Invert Transmit Clock

InvertTxC

Enable, Disable

Invert Transmit and
Received Data

InvrtData

Enable, Disable

Send All Ones on Data Port
Not Ready

All Ones

Disable, DTR, RTS, Both

Action on Network Yellow
Alarm

Rcv Yellow

None, Halt

Network Init. Data Channel
Loopback

Net DCLB

Disable, V.54, FT1, Both

Port (DTE) Initiated
Loopbacks

Port LB

Disable, DTLB, DCLB, Both

Embedded Data Link

EDL

Enable, Disable

EDL Management Link

Mgmt Link

Enable, Disable

Excessive Error Rate
Threshold

Err Rate

10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9

Near-End Performance
Statistics

Near-end

Disable, Maintain, Send,
Both

Far-End Performance
Statistics

Far-end

Disable, Maintain

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

3160-A2-GB21-90

Sync Data Port Options
(Port 2)

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Type

E530, V.35, RS449, X.21

Port Base Rate

Base Rate

Nx64, Nx56

Transmit Clock Source

Tx Clock

Internal, External

Invert Transmit Clock

InvertTxC

Enable, Disable

Invert Transmit and
Received Data

InvrtData

Enable, Disable

Send All Ones on Data Port
Not Ready

All Ones

Disable, DTR, RTS, Both

Action on Network Yellow
Alarm

Rcv Yellow

None, Halt

Network Init. Data Channel
Loopback

Net DCLB

Disable, V.54, FT1, Both

Port (DTE) Initiated
Loopbacks

Port LB

Disable, DTLB, DCLB, Both

Embedded Data Link

EDL

Enable, Disable

EDL Management Link

Mgmt Link

Enable, Disable

Excessive Error Rate
Threshold

Err Rate

10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9

Near-End Performance
Statistics

Near-end

Disable, Maintain, Send,
Both

Far-End Performance
Statistics

Far-end

Disable, Maintain

February 2001

H-17

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

H-18

Sync Data Port Options
(Port 3)

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Type

E530, V.35, RS449, X.21

Port Base Rate

Base Rate

Nx64, Nx56

Transmit Clock Source

Tx Clock

Internal, External

Invert Transmit Clock

InvertTxC

Enable, Disable

Invert Transmit and
Received Data

InvrtData

Enable, Disable

Send All Ones on Data Port
Not Ready

All Ones

Disable, DTR, RTS, Both

Action on Network Yellow
Alarm

Rcv Yellow

None, Halt

Network Init. Data Channel
Loopback

Net DCLB

Disable, V.54, FT1, Both

Port (DTE) Initiated
Loopbacks

Port LB

Disable, DTLB, DCLB, Both

Embedded Data Link

EDL

Enable, Disable

EDL Management Link

Mgmt Link

Enable, Disable

Excessive Error Rate
Threshold

Err Rate

10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9

Near-End Performance
Statistics

Near-end

Disable, Maintain, Send,
Both

Far-End Performance
Statistics

Far-end

Disable, Maintain

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

3160-A2-GB21-90

Sync Data Port Options
(Port 4)

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Type

E530, V.35, RS449, X.21

Port Base Rate

Base Rate

Nx64, Nx56

Transmit Clock Source

Tx Clock

Internal, External

Invert Transmit Clock

InvertTxC

Enable, Disable

Invert Transmit and
Received Data

InvrtData

Enable, Disable

Send All Ones on Data Port
Not Ready

All Ones

Disable, DTR, RTS, Both

Action on Network Yellow
Alarm

Rcv Yellow

None, Halt

Network Init. Data Channel
Loopback

Net DCLB

Disable, V.54, FT1, Both

Port (DTE) Initiated
Loopbacks

Port LB

Disable, DTLB, DCLB, Both

Embedded Data Link

EDL

Enable, Disable

EDL Management Link

Mgmt Link

Enable, Disable

Excessive Error Rate
Threshold

Err Rate

10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9

Near-End Performance
Statistics

Near-end

Disable, Maintain, Send,
Both

Far-End Performance
Statistics

Far-end

Disable, Maintain

February 2001

H-19

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

H-20

General Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Generate Yellow Alarm
Signals

Gen Yellow

Enable, Disable

Initial Self Test

Self-Test

Enable, Disable

Primary Clock Source

Clock Src

Network, DTE, Internal,
External, Port 1

External Clock Rate (KHz)

Clock Rate

2048, 1544, 8

Test Timeout

Tst Timeout

Enable, Disable

Test Duration

Tst Duration

1–120 (Default = 10)

User Interface Front
Panel Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Front Panel Access

FP Access

Enable, Disable

Front Panel Pass-Through

FP Pass

Enable, Disable

User Interface:
Communication Port
Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Use

Com Use

Mgmt, ASCII, Daisy,
Terminal

Port Type

Com Type

Asynchronous,
Synchronous

Clock Source

Com Clk

Internal, External

Data Rate

Com Rate

1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2,
38.4

Character Length

Char Length

7, 8

Parity

CParity

None, Even, Odd

Stop Bits

CStop Bits

1, 1.5, 2

Ignore Control Leads

Ignore DTR

Disable, DTR

Password Required

Password

Enable, Disable

Inactivity Timeout

CmInActTm

Enable, Disable

Disconnect Time

CmDiscTm

1–60 (Default = 5)

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

3160-A2-GB21-90

User Interface: External
Device Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Nest COM Port Access

Com Port

Enable, Disable

External Device Commands ComExtDev

Disable, AT, Other

Dial-In Access

Dial-In

Enable, Disable

Connect Prefix

ComConnPrefix

Text Field, Clear

Connect Indication String

ComConnected

Text Field, Clear

Escape Sequence

ComEscapeSeq

Text Field, Clear

Escape Sequence Delay
(Sec)

ComEscDel

None, 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0

Disconnect String

ComDisconnect

Text Field, Clear

User Interface: Telnet
Sessions Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Telnet Session

TnSession

Enable, Disable

Password Required

TnPaswd

Enable, Disable

Inactivity Timeout

TnInActTm

Enable, Disable

Disconnect Time

TnDiscTm

1–60 (Default = 5)

User Interface: Internal
Modem Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Modem Use

Terminal, Mgmt, ASCII

Dial-In Access

Dial-In

Enable, Disable

Password Required

Password

Enable, Disable

Inactivity Timeout

MInActTm

Enable, Disable

Disconnect Time

MDiscTm

1–60 (Default = 5)

Modem Type

Asynchronous,
Synchronous

Modem Rate

1.2, 2.4

Character Length

MChar L

7, 8

Parity

MParity

None, Even, Odd

Stop Bits

MStop Bits

1, 1.5, 2

Long Space Disconnect

LSpaceDisc

Enable, Disable

February 2001

H-21

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

H-22

User Interface: Auxiliary
Port Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Port Use

Aux Use

None, Mgmt, Daisy

Data Rate (Kbps)

Aux Rate

9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 38.4

Alarm and Trap Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

ASCII Alarm Messages

Alrm Msg

Disable, Com Port

Alarm & Trap Dial-Out

DialOut

Enable, Disable

Trap Disconnect

Trap Disc

Enable, Disable

Call Retry

Enable,Disable

Dial Out Delay Time (Min)

Dial Delay

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

Alternate Dial-Out Directory

AltDialDir

None, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Excessive Error Rate
Threshold

Err Rate

10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9

System Alarm Relay

Alrm Relay

Enable,Disable

Management and
Communication:
Communication Protocol
Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

Node IP Address

IP Adr

Text Field, Clear

Node Subnet Mask

NetMask

Text Field, Clear

Default Net Destination

Def Netwk

None, Com, Aux, FDL,
EDL1, EDL2

Communication Port IP Adr

Com IP Adr

Text Field, Clear

Communication Port
Subnet Mask

Com NetMask

Text Field, Clear

Com Link Protocol

Com Link

PPP, SLIP

Modem IP Address

Modem IP Adr

Text Field, Clear

Modem Subnet Mask

Mdm NetMask

Text Field, Clear

Modem Alt IP Adr

Alt Mdm IP Adr

Text Field, Clear

Modem Alt Subnet Mask

Alt Mdm NetMask

Text Field, Clear

Modem Link Protocol

Modem Link

PPP, SLIP

Auxiliary Port IP Address

Aux IP Adr

Text Field, Clear

Auxiliary Port Subnet Mask

Aux NetMask

Text Field, Clear

IPBusMast

Enable, Disable

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

3160-A2-GB21-90

Management and
Communication:
General SNMP
Management Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

SNMP Management

SNMP Mgt

Enable, Disable

Community Name 1

CommunityName1

Text Field, Clear

Name 1 Access

Access 1

Read, R/W

Community Name 2

CommunityName2

Text Field, Clear

Name 2 Access

Access 2

Read, R/W

Management and
Communication:
SNMP NMS Security
Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

NMS IP Validation

NMS Valid

Enable, Disable

Number of Managers

Num Sec Mgrs

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

NMS n IP Address

NMS n IP Adr

Text Field, Clear

Access Level

NMS n Access

Read, R/w

Management and
Communication:
SNMP Trap Options

Front Panel Equivalent

Value (Default in Bold)

SNMP Traps

SNMP Trap

Enable, Disable

Number of Trap Managers

Num Trap Mgrs

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Trap n IP Address

Trapn IP Adr

Text Field, Clear

Trap Manager n Destination

Trapn Dst

None, Com, Aux, FDL,
EDL1, EDL2

General Traps

Gen Trap

Disable, Warm, AuthFail,
Both

Enterprise Specific Traps

Entp Trap

Enable, Disable

Link Traps

Link Trap

Disable, Up, Down, Both

Link Trap Interfaces

Trap I/F

Network, DTE, T1s, Ports,
All

February 2001

H-23

H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation

H-24

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Equipment List

I
Equipment

Feature Number

Model 3160 DSU/CSU

3160-A3-210

Model 3164 DSU/CSU

3164-A2-210

Model 3165 DSU/CSU

3165-A2-210

T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-RJ48C

3100-F1-500

T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-DA15P (Canada)

3100-F1-510

COM Port-to-PC Cable, 8-pin modular to DB9S
(Keyed – for Models 3164-A2 and 3165-A2)

3100-F1-550

COM Port-to-PC Cable, 8-pin modular to DB9S
(Unkeyed – for Model 3160-A3)

3100-F2-550

COM Port-to-Terminal/Printer Cable, 8-pin modular to DB25P

3100-F1-540

DC Power Cable

3100-F1-520

115 Vac Power Module

3100-F1-100

Front Panel Emulation Software

3100-C1-010

EIA-530-A-to-RS-449/422 Adapter

3100-F1-580

EIA-530-A-to-V.35 Adapter

3100-F1-570

EIA-530-A-to-X.21 Adapter

3100-F1-571

Wall-Mount/Rack-Mount Adapter

3100-F1-400

Model 3161 DSU/CSU

3161-B3-010

Auxiliary Backplane

3100-F1-900

NOTE:
Cable numbers for the 3161 DSU/CSU are located in the ACCULINK 3151
CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

I-1

I. Equipment List

I-2

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Glossary

1in8 Test

A test pattern consisting of a one (1) followed by seven zeros (on the network only).

3000 Series Carrier

A rack-mounted device containing 17 slots in which to place circuit cards.

ACAMI allocation
method

Alternate Channel Alternate Mark Inversion. A method of allocating DS0 channels as a
group, so that every alternate DS0 channel does not carry data, but instead transmits and
receives all ones.

ACCULINK

A product family and a registered trademark of Paradyne.

ACO

Alarm Cut-off command. A command for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs that forces a
deactivation of the alarm relay on the 3000 Series Carrier.

Activ

Active configuration area. The configuration option set that is currently active for the
device. Before a configuration option set becomes active, you must save the set to the
Active configuration area.

adapter

Hardware that provides some transitional function between two or more devices.

address

A symbol (usually numeric) that identifies the interface attached to a network.

agent (SNMP)

A software program housed within a device to provide SNMP functionality. Each agent
stores management information and responds to the manager’s request for this
information.

aggregate

A single bit stream that combines two or more bit streams.

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal. An all ones signal transmitted to maintain transmission continuity
and to indicate to the receiving terminal that a transmission fault exists at either the
transmitting terminal or upstream of the transmitting signal. Sometimes referred to as Blue
Alarm.

AMI

Alternate Mark Inversion. A line coding technique used to accommodate the ones density
requirements of E1 or T1 lines.

ANSI

American National Standards Institute. A member of ISO, ANSI accredits and implements
standards.

application

The use to which a device is put.

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. The standard for data transmission
over telephone lines. A 7-bit code establishes compatibility between data services. The
ASCII code consists of 32 control characters (nondisplayed) and 96 displayed characters.

ASCII
terminal/printer

A device that can be attached, either locally or remotely, to a DSU/CSU to display or print
alarm messages.

asynchronous data

Data that is formatted so it is synchronized by a transmission start bit at the beginning of a
character and one or more stop bits at the end.

authenticationFailure
trap

An SNMP trap that indicates that the device has received an SNMP protocol message that
has not been properly authenticated.

AUX port

The auxiliary communications port on the DSU/CSU.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

GL-1

Glossary

Auxiliary Backplane

An 8-slot backplane that fit over one half of the open section of the 3000 Series Carrier. This
is a passive assembly that provides interconnection capability between 3151 CSUs and
3161 DSU/CSUs and provides all interface connectors.

AWG

American Wire Gauge. An indication of wire size. The heavier the gauge, the lower the
AWG number, and the lower the impedance.

B8ZS

Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution. Encoding scheme for transmitting clear channel signals over a
T1 line.

backup capability

The ability to reconfigure the DSU/CSU and restore data circuits through an external
backup device.

bandwidth

The range of frequencies that can be passed by a transmission medium, or the range of
electrical frequencies a device is capable of handling.

BES

Bursty Error Seconds. A second in which more than one but less than 320 CRC6 error
events have occurred.

bipolar signal

A signal in which successive ones (marks, pulses) are of alternating positive and negative
polarity, and in which a zero (space, no pulse) is of zero amplitude.

bit

Binary digit. The smallest unit of information, representing a choice between a one or a zero
(sometimes called mark or space).

bit stuffing

The insertion of ones into the outgoing bit stream to enforce ones density requirements.

block allocation
method

A method of allocating digital signal level 0 (DS0) channels as a group rather than
individually.

bps

Bits per second. Indicates the speed at which bits are transmitted across a data connection.

BPV

Bipolar Violation. In a bipolar signal, a one (mark, pulse) which has the same polarity as its
predecessor.

byte

A sequence of successive bits (usually eight) handled as a unit in data transmission.

CCITT

Consultative Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony. An advisory committee
established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards and policies. It
was renamed ITU in March 1993.

Carrier Detect. The received line signal detector. V.24 circuit 109.

channel

A bidirectional DS0, voice, or data path, for electrical transmission between two or more
points. Also called a circuit, line, link, path, or facility.

channel allocation

Assigning specific DS0 channels in the device to specific interfaces (Network, DTE
Drop/Insert, etc.).

CHAP

Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. A security technique that allows a user
password to be encrypted for transmission.

character

A letter, figure, number, punctuation, or other symbol.

CID branch

Customer Identification branch or the DSU/CSU menu tree.

client

A device that receives a specific service, such as database management, from a server.

CLOCK IN interface

The external clock interface on the DSU/CSU.

ClrReg branch

Clear Performance Registers branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

Cnfig branch

Configuration branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

coding

A technique used to accommodate the ones density requirements of E1 lines.

GL-2

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Glossary

COM port

Communications port. A computer’s serial communications port used to transmit to and
receive data from a modem. The modem connects directly to this port.

community name

An identification used by an SNMP manager to grant an SNMP server access rights to a
MIB.

COMSPHERE

A proprietary product family name and a registered trademark of Paradyne.

configuration

The arrangement of a system or network as defined by the characteristics of its functional
units.

configuration option

Device software that sets specific operating parameters for the device. Sometimes referred
to as straps.

CPU fail

Central Processing Unit failure. A Self-Test Health message indicating a failure in the
device’s central processing unit.

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Check. A mathematical method of confirming the integrity of received
digital data.

CRC6

CRC using six check bits.

CSA

Canadian Standards Association.

CSU

Channel Service Unit. A device that connects service user equipment such as a DSU to the
local digital telephone loop, protects the line from damage, and regenerates the signal.

Ctrl branch

Control branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

CTS

Clear To Send. A signal indicating that the device is ready for the DTE to transmit data.
Usually occurs in response to Request To Send (RTS).

Cust1

Customer 1 configuration area. The first of two sets of customer-defined configuration
options.

Cust2

Customer 2 configuration area. The second of two sets of customer-defined configuration
options.

The transmission standard that specifies 12 frames as a superframe that is used for frame
synchronization and to locate signaling bits.

daisy chaining

Connecting the COM port of one device to the AUX port of another device to provide SNMP
connectivity.

data port

The electrical interface between the device and the synchronous data terminal equipment.

database

An organized compilation of computerized data.

DB15 connector

A 15-position connector used on cables or devices.

DB25 connector

A 25-position connector used on cables or devices.

DCE

Data Communications Equipment. The equipment that provides the functions required to
establish, maintain, and end a connection. It also provides the signal conversion required for
communication between the DTE and the network.

DCLB

Data Channel LoopBack. Loops the data received from the network interface, for all DS0
channels allocated to the selected port, back to the network.

default

A factory-preset value that is assumed to be correct unless changed by the user.

DevFail

Device Failure. A message that indicates that an internal failure has been detected by the
operating firmware. An 8-digit code appears for use by service personnel.

DevHS branch

Device Health and Status branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

GL-3

Glossary

device

A mechanical, electrical, or electronic unit with a special purpose.

digital signal

A signal composed of only two discrete values, representing the binary digits 0 and 1.

diskette

A thin, flexible magnetic disk enclose in a protective jacket.

DL branch

Download branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

DLB

DTE Loopback. Loopback mode that loops the information received on the DTE T1 network
interface back to the network as close to the network interface as possible.

download

A process that transfers device firmware and software from a locally-attached PC to a
device, or allows the duplication of firmware and software from a local device to a remote
device.

downstream device

A device that is connected farther from the host computer.

drop/insert

An interconnection point for terminals, multiplexers, and transmission facilities. Individual
channels may be inserted into the aggregate stream or dropped out to accommodate
specific applications.

DSR

Data Set Ready. A signal from the modem to the DTE that indicates the modem is turned
ON and connected to the DTE.

DSU

Data Service Unit. Data communications equipment that provides timing, signal
regeneration, and an interface to data terminal equipment. A subrate DSU/CSU is normally
referred to as a DSU.

DSX-1

Digital Signal Cross Connect level 1. An interconnection point for terminals, multiplexers
and transmission facilities.

DS0

Digital Signal Level 0. A 64 kbps standard signal or channel.

DS0 channel
allocation

Assigning specific DS0 channels in the DSU/CSU to specific interfaces (network, DTE
Drop/Insert, etc.).

DS1

Digital Signal level 1. A signal of 1.544 Mbps in North America.

DS1/E1 MIB

Defines objects for managing the network and DTE Drop/Insert interfaces on the DSU/CSU.

DTE

Data Terminal Equipment. The equipment, such as a computer or terminal, that provides
data in the form of digital signals for transmission.

DTE Drop/Insert
interface

The Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface on the rear panel of the DSU/CSU.

DTLB

Data Terminal Loopback. Loopback mode that loops the data for a particular synchronous
data port back to the port just before it is combined with the rest of the T1 data stream.

DTMF

Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency. A signaling method using two voice frequencies to designate
the tones used for touch-tone dialing, as distinguished from pulse dialing.

DTR

Data Terminal Ready. A signal from the DTE to the modem, sent via Pin 20 of the
EIA-232 interface (V.24 circuit 108/1, /2), that indicates the DTE is turned ON and
connected to the modem.

A wideband digital interface operating at 2.048 Mbps, defined by ITU recommendations
G.703 and G.704. It is used primarily outside North America.

EDL

Embedded Data Link. The 8 kbps in-band performance channel that provides 4 kbps of
user bandwidth for the support of an SNMP management link.

EER

Excessive Error Rate. An error rate that is greater than the threshold that has been
configured in the device.

GL-4

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Glossary

EIA

Electronic Industries Association. This organization provides standards for the data
communications industry to ensure uniformity of interface between DTEs and DCEs.

EIA-530-A

An Electronic Industries Association standard for a high-speed, 25-position, DCE/DTE
interface.

Enterprise MIB

MIB objects unique to a specific company’s devices.

enterprise-specific
trap

A trap unique to a specific company’s devices.

EON

End of Number.

error

A discrepancy between a measured or computed value or condition and the true or
specified value or condition.

Errored Seconds. A second with one or more ESF error events (one or more CRC6 error
events or OOFs).

ESD

ElectroStatic Discharge. An undesirable discharge of static electricity that can damage
equipment and degrade electrical circuitry.

ESF

Extended SuperFrame. The T1 transmission standard that specifies 24 frames as an
extended superframe to be used for frame synchronization and to locate signaling bits.

Fact1

Factory 1 configuration area. The first of two configuration option sets that are preset at the
factory (read-only options).

Fact2

Factory 2 configuration area. The second of two configuration option sets that are preset at
the factory (read-only options).

failure

An uncorrected hardware error.

fault

An accidental condition that causes a functional unit to fail to perform its required function.

FCC

Federal Communications Commission. The Board of Commissioners that regulates all
electrical communications that originate in the United States.

FDL

Facility Data Link. The selected framing bits in the ESF format used in a wide-area link that
are used for control, monitoring, and testing.

fractional E1

Individual DS0 channels that may be sold separately or in groups to provide bandwidth that
is some fraction of the total E1 capability.

frame

One identifiable group of bits that includes a sequence of bits for control, framing, etc.

frame relay

A high-speed connection-oriented packet switching WAN protocol using variable-length
frames.

framing

A technique that separates bits into identifiable groups.

Generic-Interface
Extension MIB

An extension to MIB II that defines additional objects for control of generic interfaces in
MIB II.

Get command
(SNMP)

A command providing read-only access to SNMP MIB objects.

ground

A physical connection to earth or other reference point.

HDLC

High-Level Data Link Control. A communications protocol defined by the International
Standards Organization (ISO).

host

A computer attached to a network that shares its information and devices with the rest of the
network.

Hertz. A unit of frequency that equals one cycle per second.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

GL-5

Glossary

ICMP

Internet Control Management Protocol. Internet protocol that allows for the generation of
error messages, tests packets, and information messages related to IP.

ID branch

Identity branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

interface

A shared boundary between functional units.

Internet

The worldwide internetwork, which predominantly uses the TCP/IP protocol.

internetwork

An interconnected collection of networks (also called an internet).

IP address

Internet Protocol address. The address assigned to an internet host.

ISO

International Standards Organization.

ITU

International Telecommunications Union. The telecommunications agency of the United
Nations, established to provide standardized communications procedures and practices.
Before March 1993 it was called CCITT.

kbps

Kilobits per second. One kilobit is usually taken to be 1,024 bits.

LAN

Local Area Network. A privately owned and administered data communications network
limited to a small geographic area.

LBO

Line Build-Out. The amount of attenuation of the transmitted signal that is used to
compensate for the length of wire between the transmitter and the receiver.

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display. Thin glass plates containing liquid crystal material. When voltage is
applied, the amount of light able to pass through the glass plates is altered so that
messages can be displayed.

LCP

Link Control Protocol.

LED

Light Emitting Diode. A light or status indicator that glows in response to the presence of a
certain condition (e.g., an alarm).

link layer protocol

The protocol that regulates the communication between two network nodes.

link trap

A trap that identifies the condition of the communications interface (linkDown or linkUp
traps).

LLB

Line LoopBack. A test in which the received signal on the network interface is looped back
to the network without change.

LOF

Loss of Frame. Occurs when a DS1 terminal is unable to synchronize on the DS1 signal for
some interval.

LOFC

Loss Of Frame Count. The number of LOFs declared.

loopback test

A test that verifies a device’s operation by connecting the device’s output to the device’s
input.

LOS

Loss of Signal. The T1 line condition where there are no pulses.

Lpbk branch

Local Loopback branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

LQR

Link Quality Reports.

manager (SNMP)

The device that queries agents for management information, or receives unsolicited
messages (traps) indicating the occurrence of specific events.

master clock

The master timing source used to synchronize all of the T1 and data port interfaces on the
DSU/CSU.

Megabyte or megabytes. A unit of memory measurement equal to approximately one
million bytes (typically 1,048,576 bytes).

GL-6

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Glossary

Mbps

Megabits per second. One megabit is 1,048,576 (10242) bits.

menu tree

The structure containing the menu hierarchy starting at a Top-Level menu and extending
down to various device functions.

MIB

Management Information Base. A database of managed objects used by SNMP to provide
network management information and device control.

MIB II

MIB Release 2. The current Internet-standard MIB, defined by RFC 1213.

module

A compact assembly functioning as a component in a larger system or unit.

MRU

Maximum Request Unit.

network

A configuration of data processing devices used for information exchange.

network interface

The T1 network interface connector on the rear panel of the DSU/CSU.

NMS

Network Management System. A computer system used for monitoring and controlling
network devices.

node

A connection or switching point on the network.

object (SNMP)

A specific item within a Management Information Base (MIB).

OOF

Out Of Frame. An error condition in which frame synchronization bits are in error.

option

A hardware or software function that can be selected or enabled as part of a configuration
process.

PAP

Password Authentication Protocol. A security technique that requires a user password for
access to a system.

parity

A way of checking data accuracy by counting the number of bits that have a value of one.

PBX

Private Branch Exchange. Telephone switching equipment dedicated to one customer. A
PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network.

Personal Computer.

PDU

Protocol Data Unit. A message containing protocol-specific information.

PDV

Pulse Density Violation. The number of ones (marks, pulses) is not adequate for the line
requirement.

Perf branch

Performance Report branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

PLB

Payload Loopback. Loopback mode that loops the information received on the T1 network
interface back to the network after it has passed through receive and transmit framing
section.

PORT (1–4)
interface

The synchronous data port interface on the DSU/CSU.

POWER connector

The power input connector on the DSU/CSU.

power-on self-test

A test that checks most hardware components when power is applied to the device or a
reset is initiated.

PPP

Point-to-Point Protocol. A protocol for packet transmission over serial links, specified by
Internet RFC 1661.

PRBS

Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence. A test pattern containing any possible combination of digital
ones and zeros for a given string length.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

GL-7

Glossary

PRM

Performance Report Messages. Messages indicating the current state of a T1 line as
specified by ANSI-T1-403.

protocol

A set of rules that determines the behavior of devices in achieving and maintaining
communication.

PSTN

Public Switched Telephone Network. A network shared among many users who can use
telephones to establish connections between two points. Also known as dial network.

Ptrns branch

Test Patterns branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

pulse density

A measure of the number of ones (marks, pulses) in relation to the total number of bits
transmitted.

QRSS

Quasi-Random Signal Source. A test pattern simulating a random pattern of digital ones
and zeros used to simulate normal transmission.

RAM

Random-Access Memory. Read/write memory that is volatile and loses its contents when
power is removed.

A part of the device’s memory that holds stored values.

Rel branch

Release branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

reset

An initialization of the device that occurs at power-up or in response to a reset command.

RFC

Request for Comments. One of the documents published by the Internet Engineering Task
Force that describe Internet protocols and policies.

RIP

Routing Information Protocol. A protocol for exchanging routing information.

RJ48C

An 8-position modular connector.

RLB

Repeater LoopBack. Loops the signal being sent to the network back to the DTE
Drop/Insert and data ports after it has passed through the framing circuitry of the device.

Rlpbk branch

Remote Loopback branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

router

A device that connects LANs by dynamically routing data according to destination and
available routes.

RS-232

An Electronic Industries Association’s standard for a low-speed, 25-position, DCE/DTE
interface.

RS-232-like MIB

RFC 1659, which defines objects for managing RS-232-type interfaces (e.g., RS-422,
RS-423, etc.) and supports synchronous data ports and management communication ports
on the device.

RS-449

An Electronic Industries Association’s standard for a general-purpose, 37-position,
DCE/DTE interface.

RTS

Request to Send. A signal from the DTE to the device, indicating that the DTE has data to
send. V.24 circuit 105.

Receive. To obtain transmitted signals.

RXC

Receive Clock. V.24 circuit 115.

RXD

Received Data. Pin 3 of the EIA-232 interface that is used by the DTE to receive data from
the modem. Conversely, the modem uses Pin 3 to transmit data to the DTE.

SDCP

Shared Diagnostic Control Panel. A feature that allows carrier-mounted devices to share the
same diagnostic control panel.

self-test

A test that checks most hardware components when power is applied to the device or a
reset is initiated.

GL-8

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Glossary

server

A device that offers a specific service, such as database management, to a client.

SES

Severely Errored Seconds. Usually defined as a second during which a specific number of
CRC errors was exceeded, or an OOF or other critical error occurred.

Set Command
(SNMP)

A command providing write access to SNMP MIB objects.

Superframe. Also known as D4 framing, the T1 transmission standard that specifies
12 frames to be used for frame synchronization and to locate signaling bits.

SLIP

Serial Line Internet Protocol. Protocol for serial operation on an internet.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocol for open networking management.

Stat branch

Status branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

StEvnt

Status Event Register. Records the occurrence of certain alarm conditions.

subnet

A portion of a network, which may be a physically independent network segment, that
shares a network address with other portions of the network and is distinguished by a
subnet number. A subnet is to a network what a network is to an internet.

subnet mask

A number that identifies the subnet portion of a network address. The subnet mask is a
32-bit Internet address written in dotted-decimal notation with all the 1s in the network and
subnet portions of the address.

synchronous data

Data transmission that is synchronized by timing signals. Characters are sent at a fixed rate.

A term for a digital carrier facility used to transmit a DS1 formatted digital signal at
1.544 Mbps. It is used primarily in North America.

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The dominant protocol suite in the
worldwide Internet, TCP allows a process on one machine to send data to a process on
another machine using the IP. TCP can be used as a full-duplex or one-way simplex
connection.

Telnet

Virtual terminal protocol in the Internet suite of protocols. Allows the user of one host
computer to log into a remote host computer and interact as a normal terminal user of the
remote host.

time slot

One of the ways in which bandwidth can be specified for multiplexer channel groups. Time
slots are specified by any number from one to twenty-four, with each time slot equal to
64 kbps.

trap (SNMP)

A notification message to the SNMP manager when an unusual event occurs on a network
device, such as a reinitialization.

TStat branch

Test Status branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.

Transmit. To send signals from a device.

TXC

Transmit Clock. V.24 circuit 114.

TXD

Transmit Data. Pin 2 of the EIA-232 interface that is used by the DTE to transmit data to the
modem. Conversely, the modem uses Pin 2 to receive data from the DTE.

UAS

Unavailable Seconds. A count of one-second intervals when service is unavailable.

UDP

User Datagram Protocol. A TCP/IP protocol describing how messages reach application
programs within a destination computer.

Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. An organization which promotes product safety.

V.24

An ITU-T standard for a low-speed, 25-position, DCE/DTE interface.

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

GL-9

Glossary

V.35

An ITU-T standard for a high-speed, 34-position, DCE/DTE interface.

V.54

An ITU-T standard for local and remote diagnostic loopback tests.

V.54 Loop 2

An ITU-T standard for a data channel loopback (DCLB).

V.54 Loop 3

An ITU-T standard for a data terminal loopback (DTLB).

Vac

Volts alternating current.

Vdc

Volts direct current.

Voice Frequency. The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound
(usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz). This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal.

WAN

Wide Area Network. A network that spans a large geographic area.

warmStart trap

An SNMP trap that indicates that the device has reinitialized itself.

XTXC

External Transmit Clock. V.24 circuit 113.

Yellow Alarm

An outgoing signal transmitted when a DS1 terminal has determined that it has lost the
incoming signal.

GL-10

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Index

abort
lamp test, 4-36
loopback, 4-29
test patterns, 4-34
ac power module, 1-7, B-1
ACAMI method of channel allocation, 3-40
Activ (Active) configuration area
functional description, 3-14
addressing. See IP (Internet Protocol) addressing
agent
SNMP, 1-3
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) condition
ASCII terminal/printer message, 4-11
Device Health and Status message, 4-4
front panel LED indication, 3-6–3-7
troubleshooting, 4-15
Alarm Configuration branch
example of use, 3-26
option table, C-28
option worksheet, C-44
alarm messages. See messages, alarm
allocation
DS0 channel, 3-29
AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion), C-2
applications, 2-1
ASCII terminal/printer
cabling example, 2-8
used for alarm messages, 1-2
ATI (Asynchronous Terminal Interface)
restoring, H-1
authenticationFailure trap, 4-12
AUX Port
configuration option, C-26
functional description, 1-7
physical description, 1-5–1-6
pin assignments, D-5
used with SNMP system, 1-3, 2-3, 3-20, F-1

B8ZS (Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution) coding
configuration option, C-2, C-8
Self-Test Health message, 4-2
backup capability, 3-45
BES (Bursty Errored Seconds) report, 4-9
block method of channel allocation, 3-40
BPV (Bipolar Violation) condition
front panel LED indication, 3-7
Performance Report message, 4-10
troubleshooting, 4-15

3160-A2-GB21-90

C
cabling
examples, 2-8
pin assignments, D-1
Chan (Channel) Configuration branch
example of use, 3-29
option table, C-10
option worksheet, C-47–C-48, C-50–C-51
channel allocation, 3-29
configuration options, C-10
procedure for configuring, 3-29
CID (Customer Identification) branch
example of use, 3-11
Circuit Identifier configuration option, C-10
CLOCK IN interface
functional description, 1-7, 3-46
physical description, 1-5–1-6
pin assignments, D-16
clocking
configuration options, C-16
principles of operation, 3-45
technical specifications, B-2
ClrReg (Clear Performance Registers) branch
example of use, 4-8
Cnfig (Configuration) branch, C-1
coding
line, C-2

February 2001

IN-1

Index

COM Port
acquiring/releasing the user interface, 3-51
cabling example, 2-8
configuration option, C-19
functional description, 1-7
physical description, 1-5–1-6
pin assignments, D-6
reset, H-1
used with ASCII terminal/printer, 2-8, 4-11
used with SNMP system, 1-3, 2-3, 3-20, F-1
community name
configuration option, C-33
procedure for configuring, 3-24
configuration options, C-1
procedure for changing, 3-14
tables
Alarm, C-28
Channel, C-10
DTE Interface, C-2
General, C-16
Network Interface, C-8
Port, C-3
SNMP, C-32
User Interface, C-18
worksheets, C-42, H-15
connectors
rear panel
cabling examples, 2-8
functional description, 1-7
physical description, 1-5–1-6
pin assignments, D-1
connects, D
CPU failure message, 4-2
crossover cable, D-14
CSS (Controlled Slip Seconds) report, 4-10
Ctrl (Control) branch
examples of use, 3-11–3-12, 3-49, 3-53, 3-55,
3-58–3-60, 3-64–3-65, 4-8
Cust1 (Customer 1) configuration area
functional description, 3-14
Cust2 (Customer 2) configuration area
functional description, 3-14
cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
error indication, 4-9

IN-2

D
daisy chaining
configuration options, C-19, C-26
connectivity, 1-7, 2-3–2-4
data channel loopback (DCLB), 4-27, C-4
data port. See PORT (1-4) interface
data terminal loopback (DTLB), 4-28, C-4
database
SNMP, 1-3
dc power option, 2-5, B-1, D-15
default configuration options, C-2
DevFail (Device Failure) message, 4-4
DevHS (Device Health and Status) branch
example of use, 4-3
dimensions, B-2
DL (Download) branch
operation, 3-65
DS0 channel allocation, 3-29
DTE Configuration branch
option table, C-2
option worksheet, C-42
DTE Drop/Insert interface
channel allocation procedure, 3-29
configuration options, C-2
failure message, 4-2
functional description, 1-2, 1-7, 2-1
managed by SNMP, E-1
physical description, 1-5–1-6
pin assignments, D-3
technical specifications, B-2
troubleshooting, 4-14
DTE loopback (DLB), 4-25
configuration option, C-3
external control interface, D-3

E
EER (Excessive Error Rate) condition
ASCII terminal/printer message, 4-11
Device Health and Status message, 4-4
front panel LED indication, 3-6–3-7
Performance Report message, 4-10
troubleshooting, 4-15
EIA 530A interface, D-8
Embedded Data Link (EDL)
configuration option, C-6–C-7
used with SNMP system, 1-3, 2-3–2-4, F-1
enterprise-specific trap, 4-12
environmental specifications, B-1
equalization
line, C-2
error messages. See messages, alarm
ES (Errored Seconds) report, 4-9
external modem interface, D-14

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Index

Facility Data Link (FDL)
configuration option, C-8
used with SNMP system, 1-3, 2-3–2-4, F-2
Facility Interface Code, D
Fact1 (Factory 1) configuration area
functional description, 3-14
Fact2 (Factory 2) configuration area
functional description, 3-14
failure analysis. See troubleshooting
failure message
during power-up self-test, 2-10, 4-4
troubleshooting, 4-15
features, 1-1
fractional T1, 2-1–2-2
framing configuration option, C-2, C-8
front panel
acquiring/releasing the user interface, 3-51
operation, 3-1
physical description, 1-3, 3-1
Front Panel Emulation
cabling example, 2-8
functional description, 1-2, 3-1, G-1
installation and operation, G-1

lamp test, 4-35
LAN Adapter, 1-3, 1-7, 2-3–2-4, 3-20, F-1
LED Control branch
example of use, 3-12
LED Status branch
example of use, 3-13
LEDs, front panel
during power-up self-test, 2-9
functional description, 3-5
lamp test, 4-35
physical description, 1-3, 3-1
line coding, C-2
line equalization, C-2
line loopback (LLB), 4-23
link layer protocol, 3-19, 3-23
link trap, 4-12
liquid crystal display (LCD)
failure message, 4-2
functional description, 3-2
physical description, 1-3, 3-1
LOF (Loss Of Frame) condition
front panel LED indication, 3-6–3-7
LOFC (Loss Of Frame Count) report, 4-10
loopback
front panel LED indication, 3-6
local, 4-22
abort, 4-29
data channel loopback (DCLB), 4-27
data terminal loopback (DTLB), 4-28
DTE loopback (DLB), 4-25, C-3, D-3
line loopback (LLB), 4-23
payload loopback (PLB), 4-24
repeater loopback (RLB), 4-26
remote, 4-19
LOS (Loss Of Signal) condition
ASCII terminal/printer message, 4-11
Device Health and Status message, 4-4
front panel LED indication, 3-6–3-7
Performance Report message, 4-10
Self-Test Health message, 4-2
troubleshooting, 4-14
Lpbk (Local Loopback) branch
example of use, 4-22

G
Gen (General) Configuration branch
example of use, 3-47
option table, C-16
option worksheet, C-42
government regulations
Canada, E
government requirements
United States, D

I
ID (Identity) branch
example of use, 3-9
indicators. See LEDs, front panel
integral modem, D
IP (Internet Protocol) addressing
configuration option, C-34–C-35, C-37
example of use, F-1
procedure for configuring, 3-21, 3-28

K
keypad
operation, 3-3
physical description, 1-3, 3-1

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

IN-3

Index

maintenance
device health and status, 4-3
performance reporting, 4-5
power-up self-test, 2-10, 4-1
manager
SNMP, 1-3
master clock
functional description, 3-45
procedure for configuring, 3-47
messages
alarm
Performance Report, 4-9
Self-Test Health, 4-2
troubleshooting, 4-14
with ASCII terminal/printer, 1-2, 4-11
status
Performance Report, 4-9
Self-Test Health, 2-9, 4-2
Test Status, 4-37
MIBs, SNMP, E-1
MODEM Port
acquiring/releasing the user interface, 3-51
configuration option, C-24
functional description, 1-2, 1-7
physical description, 1-5–1-6
pin assignments, D-4
technical specifications, B-2
used with ASCII terminal/printer, 4-11
used with SNMP system, 3-20
Mon (Monitor) branch
example of use, 4-17

objects
SNMP, 1-3, E-1
OOF (Out Of Frame) condition
ASCII terminal/printer message, 4-11
Device Health and Status message, 4-4
front panel LED indication, 3-6–3-7
Performance Report message, 4-9
troubleshooting, 4-14
options, strap. See configuration options

N
NET (Network) Configuration branch
example of use, 3-16
option table, C-8
option worksheet, C-42
network interface
cabling example, 2-8
channel allocation procedure, 3-29
configuration options, C-8
failure message, 4-2
front panel LED indications, 3-6
functional description, 1-7, 2-1
physical description, 1-5–1-6
pin assignments, D-1
technical specifications, B-2
troubleshooting, 4-14

IN-4

P
pattern tests, 4-30
payload loopback (PLB), 4-24
PBX applications, 2-2
PDV (Pulse Density Violation) condition, 3-7
Perf (Performance Report) branch
example of use, 4-6
performance reporting, 4-5, C-7
physical description of DSU/CSU, 1-3, B-2
pin assignments, D-1
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
procedure for configuring, 3-23
used with SNMP system, 1-3, 2-3–2-4, 3-20, F-1
PORT (1-4) interface
channel allocation procedure, 3-29
configuration options, C-3
failure message, 4-2
front panel LED indications, 3-8
functional description, 1-7, 2-1
managed by SNMP, E-1
physical description, 1-5–1-6
pin assignments, D-8
technical specifications, B-2
Port Configuration branch
example of use, 3-18
option table, C-3
option worksheet, C-45
power input
cabling example, 2-8
connector, 1-5–1-7, D-15
consumption, B-1
optional power sources, 2-5, B-1, D-15
requirement, B-1
troubleshooting, 4-14
power module, 1-7, B-1
power-up self-test
displaying results, 4-1
front panel indications, 2-9, 3-6
troubleshooting, 4-14
problem determination. See troubleshooting
protocol
link layer, 3-19, 3-23
Ptrns (Test Patterns) branch
example of use, 4-30

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Index

QRSS Test, 4-30

self-test
displaying results, 4-1
front panel indications, 2-9, 3-6
troubleshooting, 4-14
Send Ones configuration option, C-3–C-4
serial crossover cable, D-14
Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP)
procedure for configuring, 3-23
used with SNMP system, 1-3, 2-3, 3-20, F-1
SES (Severely Errored Seconds) report, 4-9
Shared Diagnostic Control Panel (SDCP)
acquiring/releasing the user interface, 3-51
physical description, 3-1
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
agent, 1-3
configuration options
examples of use, 3-19, 3-26
option table, C-32
option worksheet, C-52
connection examples, 2-3, 2-8, F-1
database, 1-3
IP addressing, F-1
manager, 1-3
MIBs
functional description, E-1
list of objects, E-1
procedure for configuring access, 3-24
objects, 1-3
principles of operation, 1-3
SNMP Down message, 4-4, 4-15
traps
functional description, 1-3, 4-12
procedure for configuring, 3-26
specifications
environmental, B-1
Stat (Status) branch
examples of use, 3-9, 3-13, 4-1, 4-3, 4-6, 4-37
status messages. See messages, status
STest (Self-Test Health) branch
example of use, 4-1
StEvnt (Status Event) report, 4-10
straps. See configuration options
subnet, 3-19, C-35, C-37, F-2
synchronous data port, E-1

R
rate
auxiliary port, C-26
communications port, C-23
external clock, C-17
synchronous data port, C-13
rear panel
connectors. See connectors, rear panel
physical description, 1-5
Rel (Release) branch
example of use, 3-53
remote loopback, 4-19
repeater loopback (RLB), 4-26
reset
async terminal operation, H-1
front panel indications, 2-9
procedure, 3-65
Reset branch
example of use, 3-65
Rlpbk (Remote Loopback) branch
example of use, 4-19
router applications, 2-2
RS-449 interface, D-10

3160-A2-GB21-90

February 2001

IN-5

Index

UAS (Unavailable Seconds) report, 4-9
User Configuration branch
example of use, 3-20, 3-61
option table, C-18
option worksheet, C-43–C-44
user interface, acquiring/releasing, 3-51

line, D
network
connection, D
technical specifications, B-1
Test branch
example of use, 4-19
test commands, 4-19
front panel LED indications, 3-6
lamp test, 4-35
local loopback, 4-22
abort, 4-29
data channel loopback (DCLB), 4-27
data terminal loopback (DTLB), 4-28
DTE loopback (DLB), 4-25
line loopback (LLB), 4-23
payload loopback (PLB), 4-24
repeater loopback (RLB), 4-26
remote loopback, 4-19
test messages, 4-37
test patterns, 4-30
test jacks
functional description, 4-17
physical description, 1-3, 3-1, 3-4
timing. See clocking
traps, SNMP, 1-3
troubleshooting
device health, 4-3
diagnostic table, 4-14
performance, 4-5
power-up self-test, 2-10, 4-1
TStat (Test Status) branch
example of use, 4-37

IN-6

V
V.35 interface, D-12
V.54 Loop 2, 4-27, C-4
V.54 Loop 3, 4-28, C-4

W
warmStart trap, 4-12
weight, B-2
worksheets
configuration option, C-42, H-15

X
X.21 interface, D-13

Y
Yellow Alarm condition
ASCII terminal/printer message, 4-11
Device Health and Status message, 4-4
front panel LED indication, 3-6–3-7
Performance Report message, 4-10
troubleshooting, 4-15

February 2001

3160-A2-GB21-90

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2001:02:27 16:25:07
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Title                           : ACCULINK DSU/CSU, Models 3160-A3, 3161-B3, 3164-A2, and 3165-A2, Operator's Guide - 3160-A2-GB21-90
Creator                         : FrameMaker 5.5.6p145
Modify Date                     : 2001:07:25 14:41:26-04:00
Author                          : Paradyne Corporation
Keywords                        : ACCULINK, 3160, 3161, 3164, 3165, DSU, CSU, DSU/CSU, CSU/DSU, 3160-A3, 3164-A2, 3165-A2, 3165-A2-210T1
Page Count                      : 298
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Paradyne 3160 A3 Users Manual ACCULINK DSU/CSU, S A3, 3161 B3, 3164 A2, And 3165 Operator's Guide A2 GB21 90

3160-A2-GB21-90 3160-A2-GB21-90

3160-A2-GB21-90 3160-A2-GB21-90

3160-A3 to the manual 5bd05cf1-f91b-4608-862a-820ef529987d

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation